Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf

231 excerpts.

Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 1 · Applies to: 453

Manuals / Brands / SMART Manuals / Automobile / FORTWO 2018 / Owner's manual / PDF SMART FORTWO 2018 AUTOMOBILE OWNER'S MANUAL Quick Links Cockpit

Table of Contents

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 2 · Applies to: 453

Table of Contents Protecting the environment smart genuine parts Warranty for the smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Vehicle equipment Declarations of conformity Operating safety Information on the REACH Regulation QR codes for rescue card Data stored in the vehicle Copyright information Cockpit Multifunction steering wheel Centre console with drawer Overhead control panel Door control panel Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display Occupant safety Travelling safely with children in the vehicle Pets in the vehicle Driving safely Understanding functions of the key Opening the door Correct driver's seat position Adjusting the seats Adjusting the steering wheel

Adjusting the mirrors

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 3 · Applies to: 453

Using the armrest Running-in a new vehicle Starting the engine Pulling away Automatic start/stop system Manual transmission Automatic transmission Using the turn signals Driving economically Braking correctly Driving on wet roads Winter driving Lane Keeping Assist Cruise control and limiter Refuelling Switching on the lighting Adjusting the lighting Using the interior lighting Using the windscreen wipers Folding the sun visor to the side Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside Understanding the reversing function Opening and closing the windows Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) Fitting and removing the draught stop (smart fortwo cabrio) Operating the climate control system Switching the seat heating on and off Using the accessories

Parking

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 4 · Applies to: 453

Using the parking aid Using the reversing camera Locking the vehicle Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system Overview of the on-board computer Calling up displays Setting values Operating and setting the smart Audio-System Listening to the radio Using a mobile phone Operating external data storage media Operating and setting up the smart Media-System Listening to the radio Using a mobile phone Connecting and operating external data storage media Viewing images Video playback Using TomTom Services Using the navigation system Using smart "ready to" services Stowing small objects Stowing luggage and large objects Using the boot separator Useful information Removing/fitting the subwoofer Opening and closing the engine compartment cover Opening and closing the service cover

Checking service products and topping up

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 5 · Applies to: 453

Checking wheels and tyres Changing a wheel Using the tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressures Using winter tyres Using snow chains Changing the window wiper blades Cleaning the vehicle Observing service due dates Parking up the vehicle Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown Removing the first-aid kit Removing the fire extinguisher Removing the vehicle tool tray Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit Jump-starting and charging the battery Towing and tow-starting the vehicle Manually releasing the selector lever lock Replacing the bulbs Replacing fuses Replacing the key battery Open a door with the emergency release Locking the doors in an emergency Notes on display messages Locking and unlocking Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag Engine, brakes, transmission Driving safety systems

Driver assistance systems

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 6 · Applies to: 453

Battery, lights, heating smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Obtaining technical data Reading vehicle data Service products Bulb types Fuse allocation Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors Installing two-way radios and mobile phones Other ManualsLib Projects

>> Owner's Manual

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 7 · Applies to: 453

smart fortwo and smart fortwo cabrio Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 8 · Applies to: 453

The following symbols are used in this Owner's Manual: G WARNING Warning notes draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. Observe the warning notes. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i These symbols indicate useful instruc- tions or further information that could be helpful to you. X Instructions that must be followed. X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several consecutive steps. (Y page) Further information on a topic YY A warning or an instruction that is continued on the next page. Display text: Display text in the instru- ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys- tem or the smart Media-System. G WARNING If the front passenger airbag has been activated, a child on the front passenger seat may be hit by the front passenger airbag in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury or fatal injury. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI- OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the "Children in the vehicle" sec- tion . Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

About this Owner's Manual

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 9 · Applies to: 453

Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Man- ual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. This Owner's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: RModel ROrder RCountry variant RAvailability The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. On right- hand-drive vehicles, the layout of compo- nents and controls differs accordingly. smart is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. smart therefore reserves the right to intro- duce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features Therefore, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases. Integral parts of the vehicle include: ROwner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent Supplements These documents should be kept in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Owner's Manuals: Digital – on the Internet The Owner's Manual on the Internet provides you with convenient access to all the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system. It also offers helpful animations, exciting background information and a wide variety of search options. Digital – as an App Using the smart guides App, you can call up all of the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system online on your phone or as a download regardless of the status of your net- work connection. Available for smart- phones or tablets. QR codes for the smart guides App. Apple® iOS Android™ Please note that the smart guides App may not currently be available in your country. 4535849415 É4535849415)ËÍ

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Index .........................................................

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 10 · Applies to: 453

5 Introduction ........................................... 22 Protecting the environment ................. 22 smart genuine parts .............................. 22 Warranty for the smart Audio- System and smart Media-System ........ 23 Vehicle equipment ................................. 23 Declarations of conformity ................... 23 Operating safety .................................... 25 Information on the REACH Regula- tion .......................................................... 28 QR codes for rescue card ....................... 28 Data stored in the vehicle .................... 28 Copyright information .......................... 30 At a glance .............................................. 31 Cockpit .................................................... 31 Multifunction steering wheel .............. 32 Centre console with drawer .................. 33 Overhead control panel ......................... 34 Door control panel ................................. 35 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display ......................... 36 Safety ...................................................... 37 Occupant safety ..................................... 37 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle .............................................. 43 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 57 Driving safely ........................................ 57 Entering and setting up ........................ 62 Understanding functions of the key ........................................................... 62 Opening the door ................................... 62 Correct driver's seat position ............... 62 Adjusting the seats ............................... 63 Adjusting the steering wheel ............... 64 Adjusting the mirrors ............................ 65 Using the armrest .................................. 66 Driving ..................................................... 67 Running-in a new vehicle .................... 67 Starting the engine ............................... 67 Pulling away .......................................... 68 Automatic start/stop system ................ 70 Manual transmission ............................ 71 Automatic transmission ........................ 71 Using the turn signals .......................... 75 Driving economically ............................ 75 Braking correctly ................................... 78 Driving on wet roads ............................. 79 Winter driving ........................................ 79 Lane Keeping Assist .............................. 80 Cruise control and limiter .................... 81 Refuelling ............................................... 82 Ensuring good visibility ........................ 85 Switching on the lighting ..................... 85 Adjusting the lighting .......................... 86 Using the interior lighting ................... 87 Using the windscreen wipers ............... 87 Folding the sun visor to the side ......... 89 Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior .................................................... 90 Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside ....................................... 90 Understanding the reversing function .................................................. 91 Opening and closing the windows ....... 91 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) ..................................................... 92 Fitting and removing the draught stop (smart fortwo cabrio) .................... 95 Operating the climate control sys- tem ........................................................... 95 Switching the seat heating on and off ............................................................. 98 Using the accessories ........................... 99 Parking and getting out ...................... 101 Parking .................................................. 101 Using the parking aid ......................... 101 Using the reversing camera ............... 102 Locking the vehicle ............................. 104 Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system ..................... 104 2 Contents Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating the on-board computer ..... 105

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 11 · Applies to: 453

Overview of the on-board com- puter ...................................................... 105 Calling up displays .............................. 106 Setting values ...................................... 108 Using the smart Audio-System ........... 110 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System ....................................... 110 Listening to the radio .......................... 112 Using a mobile phone .......................... 113 Operating external data storage media ..................................................... 116 Using the smart Media-System .......... 118 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System ........................... 118 Listening to the radio .......................... 123 Using a mobile phone .......................... 124 Connecting and operating external data storage media .............................. 129 Viewing images .................................... 131 Video playback ..................................... 132 Using TomTom Services ...................... 132 Using the navigation system ............. 134 Using online offerings ......................... 143 Using smart "ready to" services ........ 143 Loading and stowing ............................ 144 Stowing small objects ......................... 144 Stowing luggage and large objects ... 145 Using the boot separator .................... 148 Maintenance and care .......................... 149 Useful information ............................... 149 Removing/fitting the subwoofer ........ 149 Opening and closing the engine compartment cover .............................. 149 Opening and closing the service cover ...................................................... 150 Checking service products and topping up ............................................ 151 Checking wheels and tyres ................. 155 Changing a wheel ................................ 156 Using the tyre pressure monitor ....... 160 Checking the tyre pressures .............. 161 Using winter tyres ............................... 162 Using snow chains ............................... 162 Changing the window wiper blades .................................................... 162 Cleaning the vehicle ............................ 164 Observing service due dates .............. 168 Parking up the vehicle ........................ 169 Dealing with accidents and break- downs .................................................... 170 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown ........... 170 Removing the first-aid kit .................. 172 Removing the fire extinguisher ......... 172 Removing the vehicle tool tray .......... 172 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit ........................................................... 172 Jump-starting and charging the battery .................................................. 175 Towing and tow-starting the vehicle ................................................... 179 Manually releasing the selector lever lock .............................................. 181 Replacing the bulbs ............................ 182 Replacing fuses .................................... 184 Replacing the key battery .................. 186 Open a door with the emergency release. .................................................. 186 Locking the doors in an emer- gency ..................................................... 187 Practical advice .................................... 188 Notes on display messages ................ 188 Locking and unlocking ........................ 188 Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag ...... 190 Engine, brakes, transmission ............. 192 Driving safety systems ....................... 199 Driver assistance systems .................. 204 Battery, lights, heating ....................... 207 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System ...................................... 209 Contents 3 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Technical data ...................................... 211

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 12 · Applies to: 453

Obtaining technical data .................... 211 Reading vehicle data ........................... 211 Service products .................................. 212 Bulb types ............................................. 214 Fuse allocation ..................................... 214 Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors ................................ 217 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones ...................................... 217 4 Contents Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

12 V battery

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 13 · Applies to: 453

1, 2, 3 ... 12 V battery Important safety notes ................... 27 12 V socket see Socket (12 V) A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 199 Function/notes ................................. 57 Warning lamp (yellow) .................. 199 Activating voicemail ............................ 129 Active Brake Assist Activating or deactivating ............. 60 Display message ............................ 205 Forward collision warning function ............................................ 60 Function/notes ................................. 59 Important safety notes ................... 59 Switching off/on (on-board computer with colour display) ..... 109 Switching on/off (on-board computer with monochrome display) ........................................... 108 Adding a contact to favourites ........... 129 Additives (engine oil) ........................... 153 Additives (fuel) ....................................... 82 Adjusting the headlamp range ............. 86 Air conditioning General notes ................................... 95 Air distribution Setting (automatic climate control) ............................................. 97 Setting (heating) .............................. 96 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes ................... 98 Setting ............................................... 98 Air vents see Air vents Air-recirculation mode Activating/deactivating (heat- ing) .................................................... 96 Switching on/off (automatic climate control) ................................ 97 Airbag Enabling and disabling the passenger airbag* ........................... 53 Installation locations ...................... 41 Limited protection ........................... 42 Overview ........................................... 41 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ................................................. 43 Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ........................................ 41 Kneebag ............................................ 41 Protection provided ......................... 41 Sidebag ............................................. 41 Triggering ........................................ 38 Alarm Anti-theft alarm system ............... 104 Switching off .................................. 104 Alerts Setting (Audio-System) ................ 113 Ambient lighting Setting the brightness .................. 109 Switching on/off ............................ 109 Android Auto™ Using ............................................... 128 Animals see Pets in the vehicle Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system Priming/deactivating .................... 104 Switching off the alarm ................ 104 Aquaplaning ........................................... 79 Ashtray .................................................... 99 Audio-System Connecting a mobile phone .......... 113 Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices ............................................ 117 Connecting external audio equipment (AUX) ............................ 116 Operating ........................................ 110 Operating the radio ....................... 112 Overview ......................................... 110 Setting interruption for news ...... 113 Setting the time ............................. 111 System settings ............................. 111 Index 5 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Troubleshooting ............................. 209

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 14 · Applies to: 453

Using external devices .................. 110 Volume/sound settings ................. 111 Warranty ........................................... 23 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic climate control Activating/deactivating air- recirculation mode .......................... 97 Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion .................................................... 97 Demisting the rear window ............ 98 Demisting the windscreen .............. 98 Increasing/decreasing the blower speed .................................... 97 Setting air distribution .................. 97 Setting the temperature ................. 97 Switching on/off .............................. 97 Windows misted up ......................... 98 Automatic engine switch-off (automatic start/stop system) .............. 70 Automatic headlamp mode .................... 85 Automatic start/stop system Activating/deactivating ................. 71 Automatic engine switch-off ... 70, 71 General information ........................ 70 Automatic transmission Display message ............................ 197 Drive programs ................................ 73 Emergency running mode ............. 198 Engaging neutral ............................. 72 Engaging reverse gear .................... 72 Engaging the park position ............ 72 Gearshift paddles ............................ 74 Gearshift recommendation ............. 76 Important safety notes ................... 71 Kickdown .......................................... 73 Malfunction (on-board com- puter with colour display) ............ 197 Malfunction (on-board com- puter with monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 197 Manual shifting ............................... 73 Manually releasing the selec- tor lever lock .................................. 181 Pulling away .................................... 68 Starting the engine ......................... 67 Transmission positions .................. 72 Automatic transmission emer- gency running mode ............................ 198 AUX jack Audio-System ................................. 110 Media-System ................................ 118 B Battery Display message ............................ 207 Battery (key) Important safety notes ................. 186 Replacing ........................................ 186 Battery (vehicle) Charging .................................. 175, 178 Important safety notes ................. 175 Jump starting ................................. 177 Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 38 Belt warning ........................................... 40 Blower speed Increasing or decreasing (automatic climate control) ............ 97 Increasing/decreasing (heat- ing) .................................................... 96 Bluetooth® Activating mobile phone (Audio-System) ...................... 113, 114 Activating the mobile phone (Media-System) .............................. 125 Authorising function for mobile phone (Audio-System) ...... 114 Connecting a device (Media- System) ........................................... 130 Connecting a different mobile phone ....................................... 114, 125 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 117 Switching on/off (Media-Sys- tem) ................................................. 125 Bonnet (front) see Service cover Boot see Tailgate Boot separator Fitting ............................................. 148 Removing ........................................ 148 Brake EBD ..................................................... 61 6 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Brake Assist

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 15 · Applies to: 453

see Active Brake Assist Brake fluid Display message ............................ 195 Notes ............................................... 213 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 183 Brake lamps Display message ............................ 208 Brakes ABS ..................................................... 57 Driving tips ...................................... 78 Important safety notes ................... 78 Parking brake ................................... 69 Warning lamp ................................. 195 Braking Braking on steep downhill gra- dients ................................................ 79 Braking on wet road surfaces ........ 79 Limited braking performance on salt-treated roads ...................... 79 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away/tow-starting C Call Ending ............................................. 126 Car see Vehicle Car park Destination entry .......................... 135 Car wash (care) ..................................... 164 Care Automatic car wash ....................... 164 Carpets ............................................ 168 Cleaning the interior ..................... 167 Display ............................................ 167 Exhaust pipe ................................... 166 Exterior ........................................... 164 Exterior lighting ............................ 167 Gear or selector lever .................... 167 High-pressure cleaner .................. 164 Interior ............................................ 167 Matt paintwork .............................. 164 Notes ............................................... 164 Paint ................................................ 167 Plastic trim ..................................... 168 Reversing camera .......................... 165 Roof lining ...................................... 166 Seat belt .......................................... 167 Seat cover ....................................... 167 Sensors ............................................ 165 Soft-top system ............................. 166 Steering wheel ............................... 167 Trim pieces ..................................... 168 Vehicle ............................................ 164 Washing by hand ........................... 164 Wheels ............................................. 165 Windows .......................................... 166 Wiper blades ................................... 166 Central locking Automatic locking ............................ 90 Locking/unlocking (key) ............... 104 Centre console Overview ........................................... 33 Changing the route Navigation ...................................... 137 Child seat Approval categories ........................ 48 Basic instructions ........................... 43 Disabling or enabling the front passenger front airbag ................... 53 Front passenger seat (notes) .......... 56 ISOFIX/i-Size (fitting) ..................... 51 Notes on risks and dangers ............ 44 Recommendations for child restraint systems ............................ 46 Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems .................. 55 Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems ............................ 49 Securing (notes) ............................... 47 Securing on the front passenger seat ................................. 56 Suitability of the seats for i- Size child restraint systems .......... 51 Top Tether ........................................ 52 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehi- cle ...................................................... 44 Basic instructions ........................... 43 Index 7 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cigarette lighter ..................................... 99

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 16 · Applies to: 453

Climate control Automatic air conditioning ............ 97 Heating ............................................. 96 Setting the air vents ....................... 98 Clock Setting the time (Media-Sys- tem) ................................................. 121 Cockpit Overview ........................................... 31 Collision warning Warning lamp ................................. 204 COMAND display Cleaning .......................................... 167 Connecting a telephone Deleting a mobile phone ............... 125 Connectivity manager .......................... 134 Continuous wipe ..................................... 88 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Controlling speed see Cruise control Coolant Checking coolant level and topping up ...................................... 154 Display message ............................ 194 Important safety notes ................. 154 Temperature gauge ....................... 107 Cooling see Climate control Cooling with air dehumidification Automatic climate control .............. 97 Copyright ................................................ 30 Cornering light function ........................ 86 Cover (front) see Service cover Crosswind Assist ..................................... 60 Cruise control Activating ......................................... 82 Buttons .............................................. 82 Calling up the speed last stored ................................................ 82 Cancelling cruise control ................ 82 Deactivating ..................................... 82 Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 206 Display message (monochrome display) ........................................... 206 Function/notes ................................. 81 General notes ................................... 81 Important safety notes ................... 81 Increasing/decreasing the speed ................................................. 82 Storing and maintaining cur- rent speed ......................................... 82 Cup holder Centre console ................................ 144 Important safety notes ................. 144 Cup holder see Cup holder D DAB radio see Digital radio Dashboard Additional instruments .................. 76 Dashboard clock ..................................... 76 Data see Technical data Data sharing Managing ........................................ 134 Data storage media see External data storage media Daytime driving lights ........................... 85 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity .................... 23 Diagnostics connection .......................... 26 Digital radio Audio-System ................................. 112 Displaying services (Media- System) ........................................... 124 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) (Media-System) ................. 124 Frequency range (Audio-Sys- tem) ................................................. 112 Intellitext™ (Media-System) ........ 124 Introducing (Audio-System) ........ 112 Media-System ................................ 123 Setting interruption for news (Audio-System) .............................. 113 Slide show (Media-System) .......... 124 Digital speedometer Displaying ...................................... 109 Dipped-beam headlamps Driving abroad ................................. 87 8 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Replacing bulbs ............................. 182

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 17 · Applies to: 453

Switching on/off .............................. 85 Disconnecting ....................................... 126 Display Colour .............................................. 106 Monochrome ................................... 105 Display message Colour display ................................ 107 Display messages General information ...................... 188 Display mode Frequency display mode ....... 123, 124 List display mode .......................... 123 Preset display mode ...................... 123 Distance recorder Monochrome display ..................... 106 Distance recorder see Trip meter Distance warning function Display message ............................ 205 Function/notes ................................. 58 Warning lamp ................................. 204 Door Automatic locking (switch) ............ 90 Central locking/unlocking (key) ................................................ 104 Control panel .................................... 35 Display message ............................ 189 Emergency locking ........................ 187 Emergency unlocking ................... 186 Opening (from the inside) ............... 90 Unlocking (key) ................................ 62 Double lock function .............................. 90 Draught stop Inserting and removing .................. 95 Driver's door see Door Driver's seat see Seat Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 87 Driving economically Observing gearshift recom- mendations ....................................... 76 Driving safety system Active Brake Assist .......................... 59 Crosswind Assist .............................. 60 Driving safety system limita- tions .................................................. 57 EBD (electronic brake force distribution) ..................................... 61 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking Sys- tem) ................................................... 57 Distance warning function ............. 58 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ................................................. 60 ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ................................................... 60 Driving systems Cruise control ................................... 81 Lane Keeping Assist ........................ 80 Speed limiter .................................... 81 Driving tips Aquaplaning ..................................... 79 Brakes ................................................ 78 Downhill gradient ............................ 79 Driving in winter ............................. 79 Driving on flooded roads ................ 79 Driving on wet roads ....................... 79 Icy road surfaces ............................. 79 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ...................................... 79 Pulling away .................................... 68 Running-in tips ............................... 67 Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 87 see Economical driving E EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) Function/notes ................................. 61 Indicator lamp ................................ 199 eco score Calling up ......................................... 77 Comparing the trip .......................... 78 Display (colour display) ................. 77 Display (monochrome display) ...... 77 Evaluating the current trip ............ 77 Function/notes ................................. 77 Preferred trips ................................. 78 Renaming a category ...................... 78 Resetting a category ....................... 78 Resetting data .................................. 78 Index 9 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Saving the trip ................................. 77

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 18 · Applies to: 453

Economical driving eco score display ............................. 77 General information ........................ 75 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ............... 23 Electronic Brake-force Distribu- tion see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Electronic Traction System see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency release Driver's door ................................... 186 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ............................................ 186 Engine Automatic start/stop system .......... 70 Display message ............................ 193 Jump-starting ............................... 175 Running irregularly ...................... 192 Starting problems .......................... 192 Starting the engine with the key ..................................................... 67 Tow-starting (vehicle) .................. 181 Warning lamp (engine diag- nostics) ........................................... 193 Engine compartment ............................ 149 Engine compartment cover ................. 149 Engine electronics Notes ................................................. 25 Problem (fault) ............................... 192 Engine oil Additives ......................................... 153 Checking the oil level .................... 152 Display message ............................ 194 Notes about oil grades .................. 212 Topping up ..................................... 153 Warning lamp ................................. 194 Engine oil additives see Additives (engine oil) Entering a destination Entering a destination via TomTom Places ............................... 137 Navigation ...................................... 135 Entering the destination Selecting your home town as the destination ............................... 136 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehi- cle ...................................................... 22 EPG (Electronic Program Guide) Displaying (Audio-System) .......... 113 EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Displaying (Media-System) .......... 124 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist .............................. 60 Display message ............................ 200 General notes ................................... 60 Important safety guidelines .......... 60 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 200 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ......... 60 Exhaust pipe Cleaning .......................................... 166 Exterior lighting Cleaning .......................................... 167 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting .......................................... 66 Adjusting (electrically) ................... 66 Out of position (troubleshoot- ing) .................................................. 190 External audio equipment (AUX) Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 116 External data carriers Connection (Media-System) .. 129, 130 Operation (Media-System) .... 129, 130 External data storage media Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 110 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 116 F Factory settings Resetting (Media-System) ............ 121 Favourites Creating (Media-System) .............. 122 Managing (Media-System) ........... 122 Fire extinguisher .................................. 172 First-aid kit .......................................... 172 Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... 159 Preparing the vehicle .................... 157 Raising the vehicle ........................ 157 Removing a wheel .......................... 157 10 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Securing the vehicle against

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 19 · Applies to: 453

rolling away ................................... 170 Fitting/removing front wheel arch cover .................. 183 Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle .................... 170 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 172 Floormat ................................................ 100 Foglamps Switching on/off .............................. 86 Fording On flooded roads .............................. 79 Forward collision warning function Function/notes ................................. 60 Frequencies Mobile phone .................................. 217 Two-way radio ............................... 217 Front airbag ............................................ 41 Front cover see Service cover Front wheel arch Fitting/removing the cover .......... 183 Front-passenger front airbag deactivation system PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ................................................. 43 Status indicator ............................... 43 Frontal area cover see Service cover Fuel Additives ........................................... 82 Displaying the current con- sumption (colour display) ............ 107 Displaying the current con- sumption (monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 106 E10 ..................................................... 82 Grade (petrol) ................................... 82 Important safety notes ................... 82 Problem (malfunction) .................. 193 Refuelling ......................................... 84 Tank content/reserve fuel ............ 213 Fuel filler flap Opening/closing ............................... 84 Problem (malfunction) .................. 189 Fuel gauge ............................................. 105 Fuel level Gauge ............................................... 105 Functions of the key Understanding ................................. 62 Further settings ................................... 129 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 214 Before changing ............................. 185 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 185 Important safety notes ................. 184 Opening the fuse box ..................... 185 G Glove compartment .............................. 145 H Hands-free system see Mobile phone Hazard warning lamps Switching on/off ............................ 170 Headlamp flasher ................................... 86 Headlamps see Automatic headlamp mode Heating Activating/deactivating air- recirculation mode .......................... 96 Demisting the rear window ............ 96 Demisting the windscreen .............. 96 Increasing/decreasing the blower speed .................................... 96 Misted up windows .......................... 97 Setting the air distribution ............ 96 Setting the temperature ................. 96 Switching on/off .............................. 96 see Climate control Home address Entering and saving ...................... 136 I i-Announcements (DAB) ...................... 124 i-Size child seat securing system Fitting ............................................... 51 Suitable seats for securing ............ 51 i-Traffic Traffic announcements ................. 124 Ice warning Warning lamp (colour display) .... 207 Index 11 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Warning lamp (monochrome

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 20 · Applies to: 453

display) ........................................... 207 Ignition lock see Key positions Image Playback (Media-System) ............. 131 Immobiliser ........................................... 104 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 191 Indicator and warning lamps Battery ............................................ 207 Coolant ............................................ 194 Engine diagnostics ........................ 193 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Overview ........................................... 36 Warning and indicator lamps ........ 36 Instrument cluster lighting Setting ............................................. 108 Intellitext™ Setting (Media-System) ................ 124 Switching on (Audio-System) ...... 113 Interior lighting ..................................... 87 Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour display) ................................ 87 Changing bulbs .............................. 184 Setting the ambient lighting ....... 109 Switching on/off .............................. 87 Intermittent wipe ................................... 88 ISOFIX child seat securing system Fitting ............................................... 51 Suitable seats for securing ............ 49 J Jack Using ............................................... 157 Jump start (engine) see Jump starting (engine) Jump starting (engine) ........................ 175 K Key Changing the battery .................... 186 Loss .................................................. 188 Opening the soft top ........................ 93 Position in the ignition lock .......... 67 Problem (malfunction) .................. 188 Starting the engine ......................... 67 Key positions (ignition lock) ................. 67 Keyboard Adjusting (Media-System) ............ 120 Kickdown ................................................. 73 Kneebag ................................................... 41 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 81 Function/information ...................... 80 Warning lamp (colour display) .... 206 Warning lamp (monochrome display) ........................................... 206 Lane recognition system (auto- matic) see Lane Keeping Assist Language Selecting (Media-System) ............ 120 Language (on-board computer) .......... 109 Licence plate lighting Changing bulbs .............................. 184 Light see Replacing bulbs Lighting see Lights Lights Automatic headlamp mode ............. 85 Cornering light function ................. 86 Dipped-beam headlamps ................ 85 Display message ............................ 208 Driving abroad ................................. 87 Foglamps .......................................... 86 Hazard warning lamps .................. 170 Headlamp flasher ............................ 86 Headlamp range ............................... 86 Light switch ..................................... 85 Main-beam headlamps ................... 85 Rear foglamp .................................... 86 Setting the ambient lighting ....... 109 Side lamps ........................................ 86 Turn signals ..................................... 75 see Interior lighting 12 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Limiter

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 21 · Applies to: 453

Calling up the stored limit speed ................................................. 82 Cancelling ......................................... 82 Deactivating ..................................... 82 Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 207 Exceeding the stored limit speed ................................................. 81 General notes ................................... 81 Increasing or reducing the stored limit speed ............................ 82 Limiting the speed see Speed limiter Loading guidelines ............................... 145 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ......................................... 90 Emergency locking ........................ 187 From inside (central locking button) .............................................. 90 Loudspeaker see Subwoofer Lubricant additives see Additives (engine oil) M M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...................... 162 Main-beam headlamps Replacing bulbs ............................. 182 Switching on/off .............................. 85 Making a call Media-System ................................ 126 Manual transmission Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 196 Display message (monochrome display) ........................................... 196 Engaging a gear ............................... 71 Engaging reverse gear .................... 71 Gear lever ......................................... 71 Malfunction (on-board com- puter with colour display) ............ 197 Malfunction (on-board com- puter with monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 197 Pulling away .................................... 68 Shift recommendation ..................... 76 Shifting to neutral ........................... 71 Starting the engine ......................... 67 Manually releasing the selector lever lock (automatic transmis- sion) ....................................................... 181 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .... 164 Media-System Adjusting the on-screen key- board ............................................... 120 Buttons on the multifunction steering wheel ............................... 118 Calling up Applications man- ager ................................................. 133 Calling up menus ........................... 120 Connectivity manager ................... 134 Controls ........................................... 118 Creating favourites ........................ 122 Data connectivity .......................... 132 Display settings ............................. 120 Downloading updates and POIs ... 133 eco score ........................................... 77 Enabling data sharing .................. 134 Home screen ................................... 119 Image playback .............................. 131 Navigation menu ........................... 134 Navigation system ......................... 134 Operating the radio ....................... 123 Overview ......................................... 118 Problem solving ............................. 209 Reversing camera .......................... 102 Selecting the home screen dis- play ................................................. 120 Selecting the language ................. 120 Setting the time ............................. 121 Setting warning tones ................... 122 Status and information ................. 121 Switching on/off ............................ 119 System menu .................................. 120 System settings ............................. 120 Video playback ............................... 132 Volume/tone settings .................... 121 Warranty ........................................... 23 Message memory (colour display) ...... 107 MirrorLink™ Using ............................................... 127 Index 13 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Mirrors

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 22 · Applies to: 453

Adjustment ....................................... 65 see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror Mobile phone Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 113 Connecting (Media-System) ......... 124 De-authorising .............................. 114 Downloading data automati- cally (Media-System) .................... 125 Frequencies .................................... 217 Installation ..................................... 217 Loading and updating the telephone book (Audio-System) ... 114 Making a call (Media-System) ..... 126 Setting the sound (Audio-Sys- tem) ................................................. 114 Transmission output (maxi- mum) ................................................ 217 Using Android Auto™ .................... 128 Using MirrorLink™ ........................ 127 Using voice control (Audio- System) ........................................... 115 Using voice control (Media- System) ........................................... 129 Model series see Vehicle identification plate Multi-functional seat see Seat Multifunction steering wheel Overview ........................................... 32 Multimedia menu settings Radio settings ................................ 124 N Navigation Alternative route ........................... 138 Changing the route ........................ 137 Current location ............................. 140 Destination memory ...................... 136 Entering a destination .................. 135 Entering a destination by address ............................................ 135 Entering a destination using geo-coordinates ............................. 136 Entering a destination using the map ........................................... 135 Entering a POI ................................ 136 Entering/saving your home address ............................................ 136 Reading map data .......................... 134 Route details .................................. 137 Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations .......... 136 Setting route planning .................. 138 Setting the voice ............................ 142 Starting ........................................... 134 Starting route calculation ............ 137 Switching announcements on/off ............................................... 139 System settings ............................. 142 TomTom Services .................... 132, 141 Traffic information ........................ 140 Troubleshooting ............................. 209 Using information during route guidance ............................... 139 Way points ...................................... 138 Navigation menu settings Changing the map .......................... 142 Changing the map colours ............ 142 Managing POIs ............................... 136 Managing saved locations ............ 136 Notes on running in a new vehicle ....... 67 O Occupant safety Airbags .............................................. 41 Belt warning ..................................... 40 Children in the vehicle ................... 43 PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp ................................................... 43 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 57 Restraint system ............................. 37 Restraint system warning lamp ................................................... 37 Seat belts .......................................... 39 Oil see Engine oil Oil level Filling capacities ........................... 213 On-board computer Calling up displays (colour display) ........................................... 106 14 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Calling up displays (mono-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 23 · Applies to: 453

chrome display) ............................. 106 Important safety notes ................. 105 Operation ........................................ 105 Overview ......................................... 105 Selecting the language ................. 109 Setting and resetting values (colour display) .............................. 108 Setting and resetting values (monochrome display) .................. 108 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection On-screen keyboard Adjusting (Media-System) ............ 120 Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 23 Operating safety Declaration of conformity ............... 23 Operating system see On-board computer Original parts ......................................... 22 Outside temperature display Colour display ................................ 106 Monochrome display ..................... 105 Setting the units ............................ 109 Overhead control panel ......................... 34 Overrevving range ................................. 76 P Paint code ............................................. 211 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ...... 167 Panorama roof Cleaning .......................................... 166 Parking .................................................. 101 Engaging park position .................. 72 Important safety notes ................. 101 Parking aid ..................................... 101 Parking brake ................................... 69 Reversing camera .......................... 102 Parking brake Display message ............................ 195 General information ........................ 69 Warning lamp ................................. 195 PASSENGER AIR BAG Disabling/activating ....................... 53 Indicator lamps ................................ 43 Passenger airbag Enabling and disabling ................. 53 Problem (malfunction) ................. 191 Passenger seat Folding down .................................. 147 Petrol ....................................................... 82 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 57 Phone book Calling a contact ............................ 126 Updating the phone book ............. 129 Phone menu settings Voicemail configuration ............... 129 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) ... 168 Power windows see Side windows Programme type list (PTY) .................. 124 Protection against theft Anti-theft alarm system ............... 104 Protection of the environment General notes ................................... 22 Pulling away General notes ................................... 68 Hill start assist ................................ 70 Q QR code Rescue card ...................................... 28 Qualified specialist workshop ............... 27 R Radio Changing a station (on-board computer) ........................................ 124 Display mode .................................. 123 Displaying programme infor- mation (EPG) (Audio-System) ....... 113 i-Traffic (Traffic announce- ments) ............................................. 124 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 112 Operation (Media-System) ........... 123 Switching on ........................... 112, 123 Radio station Storing ............................................ 124 Radio text Displaying (Audio-System) .. 112, 113 Displaying (Media-System) .......... 124 Index 15 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Radio type approvals

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 24 · Applies to: 453

Tyre pressure monitors ................. 217 Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ............... 24 Rain sensor ............................................. 88 Rain/light sensor (display mes- sage) ...................................................... 208 RDS (Radio Data System) ...................... 112 REACH Regulation ................................... 28 Reading lamp .......................................... 87 Rear foglamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 183 Switching on/off .............................. 86 Rear lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 183 Rear parking aid Activating/deactivating ............... 102 Function/notes ............................... 101 Rear soft top Closing ............................................ 147 Opening ........................................... 146 Rear window heating Demisting the rear window (automatic climate control) ............ 98 Heating ............................................. 96 Rear window wiper Automatic rear window wiper when in reverse gear ....................... 89 Replacing the wiper blade ............ 163 Switching on/off .............................. 88 Rear-view mirror Adjusting .......................................... 65 Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ....... 65 Dipping (manual) ............................. 65 Recycling see Protection of the environment Reflective safety jacket ....................... 171 Refuelling Fuel filler flap .................................. 84 Important safety notes ................... 82 Refuelling process ........................... 84 see Fuel Replacing bulbs Brake lamp ...................................... 183 Dipped-beam headlamps .............. 182 Fitting/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 183 Important safety notes ................. 182 LED ................................................... 183 Licence plate lighting ................... 184 Main-beam headlamps ................. 182 Overview of bulb types ................. 214 Rear foglamp .................................. 183 Rear lamp ........................................ 183 Reversing lamp .............................. 183 Turn signal lamp (rear) ................. 183 see Changing bulbs Replacing lamps see Changing bulbs Replacing the bulb Turn signal lamp (front) ............... 183 Replacing the bulbs Interior lighting ............................ 184 Rescue card ............................................. 28 Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 193 Restraint system Basic instructions ........................... 43 Display message ............................ 191 Function during an accident .......... 38 Limited protection ........................... 37 Malfunction ...................................... 37 Operational readiness ..................... 37 Protection provided ......................... 37 Self-check ......................................... 37 Warning lamp ................................. 191 Warning lamp (function) ................ 37 Rev counter ............................................. 76 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic trans- mission) ............................................ 72 Engaging (manual transmis- sion) ................................................... 71 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ................... 165 Function/notes ............................... 102 Guide lines in the display ............ 103 Settings ........................................... 104 Switching on/off ............................ 103 Reversing feature Side windows .................................... 91 Reversing lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 183 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ......................................... 168 16 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Route

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 25 · Applies to: 453

Editing ............................................ 137 Route planning Planning a route in advance ........ 138 S Safety Children in the vehicle ................... 43 see Occupant safety see Operating safety SD card Connecting (Media-System) ......... 130 Reading map data .......................... 134 SD card slot ..................................... 118 Seat Correct driver's seat position ......... 62 Folding passenger seat down ....... 147 Seat belt Limited protection ........................... 39 Protection provided ......................... 39 Seat belts Cleaning .......................................... 167 Fastening .......................................... 40 Releasing .......................................... 40 Warning lamp ................................. 190 Warning lamp (function) ................ 40 Seat heating ............................................ 98 Seats Adjusting (manually) ...................... 63 Cleaning the cover ......................... 167 Important safety notes ................... 63 Switching seat heating on/off ........ 98 Selecting units Displaying GPS coordinates ......... 142 Selector lever Cleaning .......................................... 167 Sensors (cleaning instructions) .......... 165 Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service cover ........................................ 150 Service display Calling up (colour display) ........... 107 Calling up (monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 106 Service due date Display message ............................ 198 Service products Brake fluid ...................................... 212 Checking ......................................... 151 Coolant (engine) ............................. 154 Engine oil ........................................ 212 Fuel .................................................. 212 Important safety notes ................. 151 Topping up ..................................... 151 Washer fluid ................................... 212 Services menu settings TomTom Services ........................... 133 Setting the waveband .......................... 112 Settings Time format .................................... 121 Shift paddles ........................................... 74 Shift recommendation ........................... 76 Side bars Closing the stowage space .............. 95 Stowing ............................................. 93 Side lamps Switching on/off .............................. 86 Side spars Fitting ............................................... 94 Removing .......................................... 93 Side windows Important safety notes ................... 91 Opening/closing ............................... 92 Problem (malfunction) .................. 188 Resetting ......................................... 188 Reversing feature ............................ 91 Sidebag .................................................... 41 smart Centre see Qualified specialist workshop smart Services Registering ..................................... 143 Using ............................................... 143 Smartphone Screen Setting (Media -System) ............... 126 Snow chains .......................................... 162 Socket (12 V) Centre console ................................ 100 Soft top Cleaning .......................................... 166 Closing .............................................. 93 Closing the rear soft top ............... 147 Closing the stowage space without the side bars ...................... 95 Important safety notes ................... 92 Index 17 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening ............................................. 93

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 26 · Applies to: 453

Opening the rear soft top .............. 146 Removing the side bars .................. 93 Stowing the side bars ...................... 93 Sound Setting (Audio-System) ................ 111 Setting (Media-System) ................ 121 Speakers see Subwoofer Special destination Entry ............................................... 136 Specialist workshop ............................... 27 Speed limiter Activating ......................................... 82 Functions and conditions for activation ......................................... 81 Setting limit speed .......................... 82 Speedometer Digital ............................................. 106 Displaying (digital speedome- ter) ................................................... 109 General notes (digital speed- ometer) ............................................ 108 see Instrument cluster Starting (engine) .................................... 67 Starting the engine see Starting (engine) Station Selecting a stored station (Audio-System) .............................. 112 Setting (Media-System) ................ 123 Storing ............................................ 124 Station list Setting a station from the sta- tion list (Audio-System) ............... 112 Updating (Media-System) ............ 124 Station search ....................................... 124 Audio-System ................................. 112 Stations Setting (Audio-System) ................ 112 Storing (Audio-System) ................ 112 Steering Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 204 Warning lamps ............................... 204 Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ...................... 64 Button overview ............................... 32 Cleaning .......................................... 167 Gearshift paddles ............................ 74 Important safety notes ................... 64 Stowage areas ....................................... 144 Stowage compartment in the tail- gate ........................................................ 145 Stowage compartments Centre console ................................ 144 Cup holder ....................................... 144 Door ................................................. 144 Glove compartment ........................ 144 Important safety information ...... 144 Spectacles compartment ............... 144 Subwoofer Fitting/removing ........................... 149 Sun visor ................................................. 89 SVHC (Substances of Very High Concern) .................................................. 28 System menu Safety warnings ............................. 142 System menu settings Voice output settings .................... 142 T Tailgate Opening dimensions ...................... 211 Opening/closing ............................. 146 Warning lamp ................................. 189 Tailgate (smart fortwo cabrio) Opening/closing ............................. 146 Technical data Information .................................... 211 Vehicle data .................................... 211 Telephone Voice control .................................. 129 Telephone (on-board computer) Accepting an incoming call .......... 126 Rejecting or ending a call ............. 126 Telephone book Loading (Audio-System) ............... 114 Telephone operation Audio-System ................................. 114 Temperature Coolant (display in the on- board computer) ............................. 107 Setting (automatic climate control) ............................................. 97 18 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting (heating) .............................. 96

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 27 · Applies to: 453

Time Setting (Audio-System) ................ 111 Setting (colour display) ................ 108 Setting (monochrome display) ..... 108 Setting the time format (colour display) ........................................... 108 TIREFIT kit ............................................ 172 TomTom Services Activating ....................................... 133 Introduction ................................... 132 My Services menu .......................... 133 Starting ........................................... 133 Subscription status ....................... 133 Traffic information menu ............. 141 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .............................................. 52 Total distance recorder Colour display ................................ 107 Monochrome display ..................... 105 Setting the display unit ................ 109 Touchscreen Confirming settings with Done .... 120 Operating the touchscreen ........... 119 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting .......... 181 Important safety notes ................. 179 Towing Important safety notes ................. 179 With the rear axle raised .............. 180 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................. 180 Removing the towing eye ............. 181 With both axles on the ground ..... 180 Traffic announcements Calling up ....................................... 140 Traffic reports Switching on/off ............................ 112 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transporting the vehicle ..................... 180 Trip computer Displaying ...................................... 107 Trip meter Colour display ................................ 107 Displaying (colour display) .......... 107 Displaying (monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 106 Trip meter see Trip meter Turn signal lamp (front) Replacing the bulb ........................ 183 Turn signal lamp (rear) Replacing bulbs ............................. 183 Turn signals Replacing the bulb ........................ 183 Switching on/off .............................. 75 Turn signals see Turn signals Two-way radio Frequencies .................................... 217 Installation ..................................... 217 Transmission output (maxi- mum) ................................................ 217 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Adjusting ........................................ 175 Checking/correcting ...................... 161 Display message ............................ 201 Important safety notes ................. 161 Not reached (TIREFIT) ................... 174 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 174 Recommended ................................ 161 Tyre pressure monitor Function/notes ............................... 160 Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ................... 217 Restarting ....................................... 160 Restarting (on-board computer with colour display) ...................... 160 Restarting (on-board computer with monochrome display) ........... 160 Starting ........................................... 109 Using ............................................... 160 Warning lamp ................................. 201 Tyre sealant Using ............................................... 173 Tyres Changing a wheel .......................... 156 Checking ......................................... 155 Direction of rotation ...................... 159 Important safety notes ................. 155 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............... 162 Index 19 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Rules for new tyres ........................ 156

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 28 · Applies to: 453

Service life ...................................... 156 Snow chains .................................... 162 Storing ............................................ 160 Tyre tread ....................................... 155 see Flat tyre U Unit of measurement for distance Setting ..................................... 109, 142 Units Setting (on-board computer) ....... 109 Unlocking From inside the vehicle (cen- tral unlocking button) .................... 90 With emergency key element ....... 186 Updating the call log ........................... 129 USB device Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 116 Connection (Media-System) ......... 130 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 116 USB port Audio-System ................................. 110 Media-System ................................ 118 Using a mobile phone ................... 113, 124 V Values Setting (colour display) ................ 108 Setting (monochrome display) ..... 108 Vehicle Correct use ........................................ 27 Data acquisition .............................. 28 Electronics ........................................ 25 Equipment ........................................ 23 Implied warranty ............................. 27 Locking (in an emergency) ........... 187 Locking (key) .................................. 104 Operating safety .............................. 25 Parking ............................................ 101 Parking up ...................................... 169 Raising ............................................ 157 REACH Regulation ............................ 28 Registration ...................................... 27 Securing from rolling away .......... 170 Tow-starting .................................. 181 Towing away .................................. 179 Transporting .................................. 180 Unlocking (in an emergency) ....... 186 Unlocking (key) ................................ 62 Vehicle data .................................... 211 Vehicle data .......................................... 211 Dimensions and weights ............... 212 Vehicle dimensions .............................. 211 Vehicle emergency locking ................. 187 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate ................. 211 Vehicle menu settings Activating/deactivating eco score after a trip .............................. 78 Vehicle tool kit ..................................... 172 Video Playback (Media-System) ............. 132 VIN ......................................................... 211 Voice control system Entering a destination in the navigation system ......................... 135 Problems with the voice con- trol system ...................................... 210 Starting an application ................. 118 Volume Adjusting ........................................ 129 Adjusting automatically ............... 111 Setting (Audio-System) ................ 111 Setting (Media-System) ................ 121 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................... 199 Active Brake Assist ........................ 205 Automatic Start/Stop function (green) ............................................. 195 Automatic Start/Stop function (yellow) ........................................... 195 Brakes .............................................. 195 Collision warning (red) ................. 204 Distance warning function (red) ................................................. 204 EBD ................................................... 199 ESP® (yellow) .................................. 200 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 206 Oil pressure .................................... 194 Overview ........................................... 36 20 Index Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Parking brake ................................. 195

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 29 · Applies to: 453

PASSENGER AIR BAG ........................ 43 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 191 Seat belt .......................................... 190 Steering ........................................... 204 Tyre pressure monitor .................. 201 Warning triangle .................................. 171 Wheel bolt tightening torque .............. 159 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 156 Checking ......................................... 155 Cleaning .......................................... 165 Fitting a new wheel ....................... 159 Important safety notes ................. 155 Removing a wheel .......................... 157 Snow chains .................................... 162 Storing ............................................ 160 Tightening torque ......................... 159 Windows Cleaning .......................................... 166 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting (automatic climate control) ............................................. 98 Demisting (heating) ........................ 96 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Important safety notes ................. 154 Topping up ..................................... 154 Windscreen wipers Intermittent wipe ............................ 88 Problem (malfunction) .................. 190 Rain sensor ....................................... 88 Rear window wiper .......................... 88 Replacing the wiper blades .......... 162 Switching on/off .............................. 87 Wiping with washer fluid ............... 88 Winter driving General notes ................................... 79 Winter operation Slippery road surfaces .................... 79 Snow chains .................................... 162 Winter tyres M+S tyres ........................................ 162 Wiper blades Cleaning .......................................... 166 Replacing (on the rear window) ... 163 Replacing (windscreen) ................ 163 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Index 21 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Protecting the environment

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 30 · Applies to: 453

General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of inte- grated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resour- ces which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environ- ment by operating your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con- sumption. Rremove rear racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con- tribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the ser- vice intervals. Ralways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart Centre. Personal driving style Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehicle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time, if possible in accordance with the gearshift recom- mendations in the multifunction dis- play. Rshift up to the next gear as early as possible. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: smart will take back your end-of-life vehi- cle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. This makes an impor- tant contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. You can leave it any of these points free of charge. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national smart website for your country. smart genuine parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. 22

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 31 · Applies to: 453

well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard Rinstrument cluster Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint sys- tems. Have accessories retrofitted at a quali- fied specialist workshop. Only smart genuine parts or parts of the same quality may be used. Additionally, only tyres, wheels and accessories approved for the specific type of vehicle may be used. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering smart genuine parts. Using parts, tyres, wheels or safety-rele- vant equipment not approved by smart could endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system, could malfunction. smart tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been spe- cifically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, smart is unable to assess other parts. smart therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in smart vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only offi- cially approved for installation or modifi- cation if they comply with legal require- ments. This also applies to some other countries. All genuine smart parts meet the approval requirements. The use of non- approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. The following situations will invalidate the operating permit: RThe vehicle type changes from that sta- ted in the vehicle's operating permit, due to modifications. ROther road users are likely to be endan- gered. REmissions or noise characteristics deteri- orate. Warranty for the smart Audio-System and smart Media-System The smart sales organisation provides a warranty for a period of 24 months without a kilometre limit for the smart Audio-Sys- tem and the smart Media-System. The warranty issuer is the respective sales organisation in the country in which the accessory or replacement part was pur- chased (see list in the service booklet). Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle at the time of pub- lication of this Owner's Manual. Country- specific differences are possible. Please note that the vehicle equipment may differ from certain descriptions and illustrations provided in this manual. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. The vehicle's original purchase contract documentation contains a list of all the systems in your vehicle. Please contact any smart Centre to help clarify any questions related to the vehicle equipment and oper- ation. Declarations of conformity Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of UNECE standard UN-R10.

Introduction. 23 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Declaration of conformity for two-way

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 32 · Applies to: 453

radio systems according to Directive 2014/53/EU The components of the vehicle that receive and/or transmit radio waves are compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant regulations stipulated by Directive 2014/53/EU. You can obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. In the following, you will find the addresses of radio component manufacturers which, due to their size or nature, do not allow this information to be indicated on the equip- ment. Tyre pressure monitor sensors: Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland Transponder ring: Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Tunisia Remote Keyless Entry: Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Tunisia Alps Electric Europe GmbH, Ohmstraße 4, D-85716 Unterschleißheim, Germany Radio: Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela, Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey, Tunisia Continental Automotive, 1 Rue de Clairefon- taine, 78120 Rambouillet, France Mobile communication and telemetry: Ficosa Internationnal, Gran Via de Carles III 98, 08028 Barcelona, Spain Radar: Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229 Leonberg, Germany Windscreen unit: car2go Group GmbH, Fasanenweg 15-17, 70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen, Germany Wireless vehicle components (Mexico) The following information applies to all components of the vehicle and the informa- tion systems and communication devices integrated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: Operation of this device is dependent on the following two conditions: (1) this device or this equipment must not cause any interference, and (2) this device must toler- ate the reception of interference, including interference that may cause undesired operating behaviour. TIREFIT kit Copy of the original declaration of conform- ity: VERIFICATION OF EMC COMPLIANCE Verification No.: GZEM161000740001V Applicant: ITW Global Tire Repair Europe GmbH Address of Manufac- turer: No. 11 Kuiqing Road, Qingxi Town, Dongguan City, China. Factory: The same as manufacturer Address of Factory: The same as manufacturer Product Description: Air compressor Model No: AEROB-DP Sufficient samples of the product have been tested and found to be in conformity with Test Standards: EN 50498:2010 As shown in the Test Report Number(s): GZEM161000740001 This verification of EMC Compliance has been granted to the applicant based on the results of the tests, performed by labora- tory of SGS-CSTC Standards Technical Serv- ices Co., Ltd. on the sample of the above- mentioned product in accordance with the provisions of the relevant specific stand- ards under Directive 2014/30/EU. The CE mark as shown below can be used, under the responsibility of the manufacturer, after completion of an EU Declaration of Conformity and compliance with all rele- vant EU Directives. Date: 2016-11-10 Signature: Kobe Jian 24

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Type of radio device in the vehicle

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 33 · Applies to: 453

Frequency range Technology Transmis- sion output/ magnetic field strength 125 kHz (119 kHz - 135 kHz) Trans- ponder ring ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m 13.553 MHz - 13.567 MHz Windscreen unit (vehi- cle access system for Car2Go) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m 433 MHz (433.05 MHz - 434.79 MHz) Remote Keyless Entry Tyre pres- sure moni- tor ≤ 10 mW e.r.p. 2.4 GHz ISM waveband (2400 MHz - 2483.5 MHz) Bluetooth® ≤ 100 mW e.i.r.p. 76 GHz - 77 GHz 76 GHzRadar ≤ 55 dBm peak e.i.r.p. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunc- tions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/ maintenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified special- ist workshop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of fire. When driving on an unpaved road or off- road, check the vehicle underside regu- larly. In particular, remove trapped plant parts or other flammable material. Con- tact a qualified specialist workshop immediately if damage is detected. G WARNING If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehi- cle stationary. G WARNING Modification to electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked components. In particu- lar, systems relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no lon- ger function properly and/or jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of accident and injury. You must not tamper with wiring, elec- tronic components, or their software. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety sys- tems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good

Introduction. 25 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

time and for staying in lane. The driving

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 34 · Applies to: 453

style should always be adjusted to the cur- rent street and weather conditions. An ade- quate safe distance must be maintained at all times. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating information sys- tems and communication devices integra- ted into the vehicle. If you make any changes to the vehicle electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, slowing thresholds or a pothole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, under- body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to withstand. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, on con- tinuing your journey, you notice that driving safety is impaired, stop the vehi- cle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. The multimedia device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information is available from any smart Centre. The functionality of a roof aerial (radio, DAB) may be impaired if roof carriers are used. Metallised retrofit film on windows may also affect radio and GPS reception and have a negative impact on all other aerial functions in the vehicle interior. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only inten- ded for the connection of diagnostic equip- ment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopard- ises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floor- mats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and a device is connected to a diagnostic con- nection, the battery may become dis- charged. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can lead to emissions monitor- ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. 26

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Qualified specialist workshop

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 35 · Applies to: 453

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifi- cations to correctly carry out any neces- sary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the information contained in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a smart Centre: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conver- sions Rwork on electronic components You can obtain current information con- cerning the servicing of your vehicle at any time from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart Centre. Replacing the 12 V battery Observe the notes on the 12 V battery. smart recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a smart Centre. If you intend to replace the battery your- self, please observe the following points: Ralways replace a defective battery with a battery which fulfils the specific vehicle requirements The vehicle is equipped with either an AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) technology battery or a lithium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with a battery of the same technology. smart recommends that you only use bat- teries of the same technology which have been tested and approved for your vehi- cle. Rcarry over detachable parts, e.g. the breather hose, angled connecting piece or terminal cover from the battery which is being replaced Rmake sure that the breather hose is always connected to the original opening on the battery side Fit any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid may leak. Rmake sure that the detachable parts are reconnected in the same way Vehicle registration smart may ask its smart Centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehi- cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. smart is only able to notify the vehicle owner about vehicle inspections if smart has the vehicle registration data. In the following cases, it is possible that a vehicle has not yet been registered in the owner's name: Rthe vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer Rthe vehicle has not yet been examined at a smart Centre smart recommends registering the vehicle in a smart Centre. Notify smart as soon as possible if there is a change of address or if ownership of the vehicles changes. This can be done at a smart Centre, for example. Correct use If warning stickers are removed, you may fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in place. The following are important sources of information in regard to vehicle use: Rsafety notes in this Owner's Manual Rtechnical data in this Owner's Manual Rtraffic rules and regulations Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehi- cle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that ari- ses from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either

Introduction. 27 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

by the smart implied warranty or by the

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 36 · Applies to: 453

New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Information on the REACH Regulation EU and EFTA countries only: The REACH Regulation (Regulation (EU) no. 1907/2006, Article 33) provides for an obli- gation to inform for Substances of Very High Concern (SVHCs). Daimler AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent the use of SVHCs, and to enable the customer to handle these substances safely. There are SVHCs known to Daimler AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight. You can obtain further information at the following addresses: Rhttp://www.daimler.com/reach (German version) Rhttp://www.daimler.com/reach/en (Eng- lish version) QR codes for rescue card The QR code is affixed on the fuel filler flap and on the door pillar (B-pillar), on the opposite side. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly determine the corresponding res- cue card for a vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important informa- tion about the vehicle in compact form, such as the routing of the electric cables. Further information: http://www.mercedes- benz.de/qr-code Data stored in the vehicle Electronic control units Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control units. Some of them are necessary for your vehicle to function safely, some provide support when driving (driver assis- tance systems). In addition, your vehicle offers comfort or entertainment functions which are also made possible with elec- tronic control units. Electronic control units contain data mem- ories which can permanently or tempora- rily store technical information on vehicle condition, component stress, service requirements as well as technical incidents and faults. This information generally documents the condition of a component, a module, a sys- tem or of the environment such as: Roperating states of system components (e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre pressure) Rstatus messages of the vehicle or its individual components (e.g. wheel revo- lutions/speed, deceleration in movement, lateral acceleration, display of seat belts fastened) Rmalfunctions and defects in important system components (e.g. the lights and brakes) Rinformation on incidents in which the vehicle is damaged Rreactions of the systems in specific driv- ing situations (e.g. deployment of an air- bag, use of stability control systems) Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain sensor) In addition to the provision of control unit functions, this data serves to detect and rectify faults as well as to optimise vehicle functions by the manufacturer. Most of this data is volatile and is only processed in the vehicle itself. Only a small proportion of the data is stored in event or error memo- ries. When service work is carried out on your vehicle, the technical data from the vehicle can be read out by service network staff (e.g. workshops, manufacturers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services). Service work is, for example, repair work, mainte- nance, warranty claims and quality assur- ance measures. The data is read out via the legally prescribed connection for the diag- nostics connection in the vehicle. The respective workshop of service network or third parties collect, process and use the data. The data documents technical states of the vehicle, help in finding errors and in improving quality and are transferred to the manufacturer if necessary. In addition, 28

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

the manufacturer is subject to product lia-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 37 · Applies to: 453

bility. For this purpose, the manufacturer requires technical data from vehicles. Error memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet during repairs or service work. Depending on the equipment selected, you can enter data in comfort and infotainment functions of the vehicle. This includes, for example: Rmultimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system Raddress book data for use in an integra- ted hands-free system or an integrated navigation system Rnavigation destinations entered Rdata on the use of Internet services This data can be saved locally in the vehi- cle or it is located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. smart- phone, USB memory stick or MP3 player). If this data is saved in the vehicle, you can delete it at any time. Transfer of this data to third parties only occurs at your request, especially as part of online services according to the settings you have selected. You can save comfort settings/individuali- sation in the vehicle and change them at any time. Depending on the equipment, these include, for example: Rsettings for seat and steering wheel posi- tions Rsuspension and air-conditioning settings Rindividualisation such as interior light- ing If your vehicle is suitably equipped, you can connect your mobile phone or another mobile end device with the vehicle. You can operate these devices via the control ele- ments integrated in the vehicle. Images and sound from the mobile phone can played back via the multimedia system. At the same time, certain information is transfer- red to your mobile phone. Depending on the type of integration, this can include: Rgeneral vehicle status Rposition data This allows the use of selected mobile phone apps, e.g. navigation or music play- back. There is no further interaction between mobile phone and vehicle; in par- ticular there is no active access to vehicle data. The provider of the app being used determines how the data may be further processed. Which settings you can adjust, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your mobile phone. Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network con- nection, this will permit the exchange of data between your vehicle and further sys- tems. The wireless network connection is enabled by a transmission and reception device belonging to the vehicle or via mobile end devices (e.g. mobile phones) you bring into the vehicle. Online functions can be used via this wireless network connec- tion. These include online services and applications/apps, which are provided by the manufacturer or by other providers. Manufacturer's own services Regarding online services of the manufac- turer, the individual functions are descri- bed by the manufacturer in a suitable place (e.g. Owner's Manual, the manufacturer's website) along with the relevant data pro- tection information. Personal identification data may be used to provide online serv- ices. The data exchange for this takes place via a secure connection, e.g. with the man- ufacturer's IT systems intended for the purpose. The collecting, processing, and use of personal identification data beyond the provision of services occurs exclusively on the basis of a legal permit or after due consent. Generally, you can enable or disable the services and functions (which sometimes have associated costs). In some cases, this also applies to the whole data connection of the vehicle. Excluded from this are special legally prescribed functions and services.

Introduction. 29 Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Services of third parties

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 38 · Applies to: 453

If it is possible to use online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protec- tion conditions and terms of use. The man- ufacturer has no influence on the contents exchanged whilst using these services. Please ask the respective service provider for details on the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data in the context of third party services. Copyright information Information on licences for Free and Open- Source software used in the vehicle and its electronic components is available at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource and on the CD provided. 30

Introduction. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cockpit

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 39 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Rev counter, dashboard clock 76 ; Instrument cluster 36 = Horn ? Instrument cluster multi- function lever 106 Windscreen wipers combi- nation switch 87 A Automatic locking feature 90 Hazard warning lamps 170 B Overhead control panel 34 C smart Audio-System 110 smart Media-System 118 D Climate control system control panel 95 Function Page E Ignition lock 67 F Adjusting the steering wheel 64 G Control panel for: Automatic start/stop sys- tem 70 Lane Keeping Assist 80 Distance warning function 58 Parking aid 101 Headlamp range control 86 H Light combination switch 85 I Automatic transmission: shift paddles 74 Cockpit 31

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Multifunction steering wheel

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 40 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Colour display of the instrument cluster 106 Monochrome display of the instrument cluster 105 ; smart Audio-System 110 smart Media-System 118 = Only for instrument clus- ter with colour display: WX Adjusts the vol- ume 118 Switches voice-oper- ated control on or off and accepts or ends a call 118 ? ® Increases or stores the current speed 82 g Decreases current speed 82 Function Page A ° Calls up the last speed stored 82 B ± Interrupts cruise control or the limiter 82 C ¯ Activates cruise con- trol 82 ^ Deactivates cruise control or the limiter 82 È Activates limiter 82 D Only for instrument clus- ter with colour display: 9: Scrolls through menus 106 a Confirms the selec- tion 108 32 Multifunction steering wheel

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Centre console with drawer

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 41 · Applies to: 453

i Vehicles with automatic transmission Function Page : Cup holders 144 Ashtray 99 ; Drawer 144 = smart fortwo: coin holder = smart fortwo cabrio: opens and closes the soft top 92 ? Selector lever 72 A Parking brake 69 Function Page B Cigarette lighter 99 12 V socket 100 C smart Media-System: AUX port, USB port and SD card slot 118 D Cup holders 144 E Selector lever indicator 72 F Sets the drive programs (program selector button) 73 Centre console with drawer 33

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Overhead control panel

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 42 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Left-hand reading lamp 87 ; Interior lighting 87 = Right-hand reading lamp 87 Function Page ? PASSENGER AIRBAG indi- cator lamps 43 A Rear-view mirror 65 34 Overhead control panel

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Door control panel

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 43 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Opens the door 90 ; Adjusts the exterior mir- rors 66 Function Page = Opens and closes the side windows 92 Door control panel 35

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 44 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Speedometer ; Display = Warning and indicator lamps C Doors or tailgate 189 7 Seat belts 190 6 Restraint system 191 ç Automatic start/stop sys- tem warning 195 è Automatic start/stop sys- tem 195 ; Engine diagnostics 193 ? Coolant temperature 194 5 Oil pressure 194 J Brakes 195 ! ABS 199 ÷ ESP® 60 h Tyre pressure monitor 201 D Power steering 204 Function Page · Distance warning signal 204 ^ Forward collision warning 204 Ã Lane Keeping Assist 206

Battery 207 R Rear foglamp 86 O Foglamps 86 K Main-beam headlamps 85 L Dipped-beam headlamps 85 T Side lamps 86 S Transmission electronics 197 8 Reserve fuel level reached 193 ¯ Cruise control 206 È Limiter 207 Ò Black ice warning 207 b Brake lamps 208 ¯ ° Next service due date 198 36 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

At a glance. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Occupant safety

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 45 · Applies to: 453

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following components: RSeat belt system RAirbags RChild restraint system RChild seat securing system The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming into contact with parts of the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide maximum pro- tection when worn correctly. Depending on the type of accident detected, seat belt ten- sioners and/or airbags may supplement a correctly worn seat belt. Not every accident will trigger the seat belt tensioners and/or deploy the airbags. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehi- cle occupant must observe the following information: Rfasten the seat belt correctly. Rbe in an almost upright position with the back against the backrest. Rsit with feet resting on the floor, if possi- ble. Ralways secure persons under 1.50 m tall in an additional restraint system suita- ble for this vehicle. However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. The risk of injuries due to a deployed airbag also cannot be com- pletely eliminated. Limited protection from restraint sys- tem G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its inten- ded protective function by failing in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for example. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint sys- tem. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. Preparing the restraint system for operation When the ignition is switched on, the restraint system warning lamp lights up 6 during the self-check. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then in operational readiness. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint system if: RWhen the ignition is switched on, the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up. RWhile driving, the 6 restraint system warning lamp remains lit or lights up repeatedly. G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered as intended in the event of an accident. This may apply to belt tension- Occupant safety 37

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ers or airbags, for example. There is a risk

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 46 · Applies to: 453

of injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Restraint system function during an accident The way the restraint system responds depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: RHead-on collision RRear impact RSide impact The activation threshold for the restraint system components is determined based on the analysis of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This proc- ess is pre-emptive in nature. The trigger- ing process of the restraint system compo- nents should take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and meas- ured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Con- versely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If, for instance, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, the rate of vehicle decel- eration may be sufficient. The restraint system components can be activated or triggered independently of each other: Component Detected trigger situation Belt tensioners Head-on collision, rear impact, side impact Driver's airbag, front-passenger front airbag and kneebag Head-on collision Sidebag Side impact G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. i smart recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: RThe bang will not usually affect your hearing. RIn general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short- term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmo- nary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. 38 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Seat belts

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 47 · Applies to: 453

Protection provided by seat belts Always fasten seat belts correctly before commencing your journey. A seat belt can only provide maximum protection when worn correctly. G WARNING If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional inju- ries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the notes on correct driv- er's seat position (Y page 62) and seat adjustment (Y page 63). In order for the correctly worn seat belt to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information: Rthe seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. Rthe seat belt must be routed across the centre of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. Rthe shoulder section of the belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. Ravoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a win- ter coat. Rpress the lap belt down into your hip joints and pull taut by the shoulder sec- tion of the belt. The lap belt must never be routed across your stomach or abdo- men. Rnever route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. Ronly one person per seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. Rnever secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the notes on "Loading the vehicle" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 145). Also make sure that objects are never placed between an occupant and the seat, e.g. a cushion. If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 43). Limited protection from seat belts G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical posi- tion. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Further- more, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Occupant safety 39

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Always secure persons less than 1.50 m

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 48 · Applies to: 453

tall in additional suitable restraint sys- tems. G WARNING Seat belts may not be used in the follow- ing situations in particular: Rthe seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is very dirty, bleached or dyed. Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or very dirty. Rmodifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor. Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam- age in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt ten- sioners may be triggered unintentionally or may not function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, seat belt ten- sioners, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not dam- aged or worn and are clean. After an acci- dent, have the seat belts checked imme- diately at a qualified specialist work- shop. smart recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifi- cally for your vehicle by smart. G WARNING Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have been triggered are no longer operational and therefore cannot protect as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, pos- sibly even fatal. Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which have been triggered replaced at a quali- fied specialist workshop immediately. smart recommends that you have the vehi- cle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rol- led up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. This could damage the door, the door trim panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfil their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Fastening and releasing the seat belt If the seat belt is pulled out quickly or sharply, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap cannot be pulled out any further. ! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do not engage the seat belt tongue in the buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise, in the event of an accident the belt ten- sioner could be triggered in addition to other systems and would need to be replaced. For easy fastening, the seat belt is routed through the seat belt guide on the side of the seat, if available. X To fasten: always engage seat belt tongue ; into belt buckle : of the cor- responding seat. X To release: press the release button in belt buckle : and guide the seat belt back by belt tongue ;. Function of seat belt warning for the driver and front passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument display is a reminder that all 40 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

vehicle occupants must wear their seat

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 49 · Applies to: 453

belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. The belt warning goes out as soon as the driver and front-passenger fasten their seat belts. i If you are using an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and the child is not secured using the seat belt of the front- passenger seat, the belt warning may be activated. In this case, you can insert the belt tongue of the seat belt into the belt buckle belonging to the front-passenger seat. To do this, guide the seat belt between the ISOFIX child restraint sys- tem or i-Size child restraint system and the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Airbags Overview of airbags The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. A deployed airbag can increase the level of protection provided to the vehicle occu- pant. AIRBAG Possible protection for: : Kneebag Thigh, knee and lower leg ; Driver's air- bag Head and thorax AIRBAG Possible protection for: = Front- passenger front airbag Head and thorax ? Sidebag Head and thorax The front-passenger front airbag can be deployed in an accident only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure both before and during the jour- ney that the status of the front-passenger front airbag is correct (Y page 43). Protection provided by the airbags Depending on the type of accident, an air- bag can supplement a correctly worn seat belt and provide added protection. G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat posi- tion, the airbag cannot carry out its intended function and may even cause additional injuries if it is deployed. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. To avoid risks, vehicle occupants must ensure the following points are followed: Rfasten the seat belt correctly. in par- ticular, make sure that the lap belt never runs over the stomach or abdo- men of pregnant women.. Rtake the correct seating position and keep as far away from the airbags as possible. Robserve the following information: Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following notes: RAdjust seats correctly before starting your journey and move the driver's and Occupant safety 41

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

front passenger seat as far back as possi-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 50 · Applies to: 453

ble. Always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (Y page 62). ROnly hold onto the outside of the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may other- wise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for exam- ple. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RWhen children are travelling in the vehi- cle, follow the related additional notes (Y page 43). RAlways properly stow and secure objects. Objects in the vehicle interior may limit an airbag's ability to function correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the following: RThere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. RThere are no objects between the seat, the door and the door pillar (B-pillar). RNo hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. RThere are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on doors, side win- dows or side panelling. In addition, no connection cable, tension- ing strap or retainer belt may be routed or secured in the deployment area of an airbag. Always observe the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions, in particular the notes on a suitable place to fit the accessory. RNo heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are kept in the pockets of clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limited protection from airbags G WARNING If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer perform its intended function. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is indicated by the AIRBAG symbol (Y page 41). G WARNING Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occu- pants as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been specifically approved for the respective seat by smart. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not performed correctly to the doors or door panelling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Conse- quently, the airbags cannot protect vehi- cle occupants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING An airbag that has been deployed once cannot provide any further protection and, in the event of an accident, can no longer perform its intended protective 42 Occupant safety

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

function. There is an increased risk of

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 51 · Applies to: 453

injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immedi- ately. Status of the front passenger front air- bag Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indi- cator lamps The front-passenger front airbag can be enabled or disabled using the airbag-off switch in the instrument panel on the front-passenger side (Y page 53). The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps are part of the front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag: RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The front-passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident. If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front- passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situation both before and during the journey: RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front airbag should be enabled or disabled depends on the child restraint system fitted and the age and size of the child. Make sure that you observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 43). There you will also find instructions on backwards and for- wards-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front- passenger front airbag is enabled. Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts" (Y page 39) and "Airbags" (Y page 41). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Observe the information on the airbag deactivation system of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 53). Travelling safely with children in the vehicle Observe carefully when children are travelling in the vehicle Be diligent i Be sure to observe the safety notes rele- vant to the situation. In doing so, you will be able to identify possible risks and avoid dangers when children are travel- ling in the vehicle (Y page 44). Bear in mind that negligence when secur- ing the child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent and secure a child carefully before each journey. To improve protection for children younger than twelve years old and under 1.50 m in height, smart recommends you always observe the following notes: RAlways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for your smart vehicle. RThe child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. RThe vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be fitted (Y page 47). Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 43

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The generic term child restraint system

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 52 · Applies to: 453

The generic term child restraint system is used in this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is, for example: Ra baby car seat Ra rearward-facing child seat Ra forward-facing child seat Ra child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guides The child restraint system must be appro- priate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observing laws and regulations Always observe the legal requirements for using a child restraint system in the vehi- cle. Ensure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you use a smart Centre. Use only approved child restraint sys- tems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: RUN-R44 RUN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems) Information about the approval categories for child restraint systems and details on the approval label on the child restraint system (Y page 48). Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: Rthe ISOFIX or i‑Size securing rings Rthe vehicle's seat belt system Rthe Top Tether anchorages Preferably, fit an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system. The risk of incorrectly fitting the child restraint system can be reduced by simply fitting it on the securing rings of the vehi- cle. When the child is secured using the seat belt integrated in the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system, be sure to observe the maximum permissible weight of the child and child restraint system together (Y page 51). The advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system Babies or infants should preferably travel in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child is seated in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and is facing backwards. Babies and infants have comparatively poorly developed neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. A rear- ward-facing child restraint system can reduce the risk of injury to the cervical spine in an accident. Secure the child restraint system cor- rectly at all times G WARNING If the child restraint system is incor- rectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. 44 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Where possible, use child restraint systems

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 53 · Applies to: 453

recommended for Mercedes-Benz (Y page 46). G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incorrectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk of injury, pos- sibly even fatal. Always fit child restraint systems prop- erly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions. RBe sure to observe the installation and operating instructions provided by the manufacturer for the child restraint sys- tem being used as well as the vehicle- specific notes at all times: - Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system to the front- passenger seat (Y page 51). - Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front- passenger seat (Y page 56). Observe the specific notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (Y page 56). If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front- passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situation both before and during the journey (Y page 43). RObserve the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint sys- tem. RAlso secure Top Tether, if available. Do not modify the child restraint sys- tem G WARNING If you modify a child restraint system or affix objects to it, e.g. toys or unsuitable accessories, the child restraint system may no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify a child restraint system. Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. smart recommends you use smart care products to clean child restraint systems recommended by smart. Only use child restraint systems which are not damaged G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or sub- jected to a load in an accident cannot perform their intended protective func- tion. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint sys- tems that have been damaged or subjec- ted to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fitting a child restraint system again. Avoiding direct sunlight G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint system. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 45

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

before securing the child in it. Never

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 54 · Applies to: 453

leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe the following when stopping or parking G WARNING If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could in particular: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic. Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake. Rchanging the transmission position. Ryou start the vehicle. There is a risk of accident and injury. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of the reach of children. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehicle. Overview of recommended child restraint systems The smart fortwo is equipped with a manual front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, dis- able the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 53). i You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you use a smart Centre. Securing with ISOFIX Weight category Size category Type1 Type approval number Order number2 Category 0+: up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months Size category E BABY SAFE PLUS E1 04 301 146 B6 6 86 8224 Category I: 9–18 kg Size category B1 DUO PLUS E1 04 301 133 A 000 970 17 02 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. 46 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Securing with the vehicle seat belt

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 55 · Applies to: 453

Weight category Type1 Type approval number Order number2 Category 0: up to 10 kg and up to approximately 6 months BABY SAFE plus II E1 04 301 146 A 000 970 13 02 Category 0+: up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months BABY SAFE plus II E1 04 301 146 A 000 970 13 02 Category I: 9–18 kg and from approx- imately 9 months to 4 years DUO PLUS E1 04 301 133 A 000 970 17 02 Category II/III: 15–36 kg and from approx- imately 4–12 years KIDFIX E1 04 301 198 A 000 970 20 02 Category II/III: 15–36 kg and from approx- imately 4–12 years KIDFIX XP E1 04 301 304 A 000 970 23 02 Suitable seats in the vehicle for fitting a child restraint system Securing systems for child restraint systems Vehicle seat

Front-passenger seat Preferred securing system: ISOFIX child seat securing system (Y page 49) or i‑Size child seat securing system (Y page 51) Also secure Top Tether if available (Y page 52) Other securing system: RVehicle seat belt (Y page 55) Be sure to observe: RIf the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front-passenger front airbag is correct depend- ing on the situation both before and during the journey (Y page 43). 1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 47

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Permitted categories for child

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 56 · Applies to: 453

restraint systems Use only approved child restraint sys- tems Only child restraint systems that meet the following UNECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: RUN-R44 RUN-R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems) Identification on the child restraint system Information about the approval category, weight category and approval number, for example, is on the approval label on the child restraint system. Depending on the approval category of the child restraint system, there may be fur- ther information, e.g. the ISOFIX size cate- gory. Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44 Example of an approval label RUniversal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled U, UF or IUF. The designation IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" cat- egory. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or a supporting bracket. RSemi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "semi-universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. RVehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129 Example of an approval label Ri‑Size: child restraint systems in the "i‑Size" category are approved for instal- lation in vehicles with i‑Size securing rings. They can be used, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems, on seats labelled i-U. The designation i-U refers to i-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" cat- egory. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or a supporting bracket. 48 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Observe the suitability of vehicle seats

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 57 · Applies to: 453

Depending on the approval category, there are forward-facing and/or rearward-facing child restraint systems. Usage may be limi- ted for certain vehicle seats. RSuitability of the seats for attaching ISO- FIX child restraint systems (Y page 49) RSuitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems (Y page 51) RSuitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems (Y page 55) Securing the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ISOFIX identification ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems. RThis symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN-R44 (Y page 48). ROnly secure child restraint systems approved by UN-R44 in accordance with the following ISOFIX tables. Carry cot Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air- bag enabled Front-passenger front air- bag disabled1 F ISO/L1 X X G ISO/L2 X X X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight cate- gory and/or size category. 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front- passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 49

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approximately 6 months)

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 58 · Applies to: 453

Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air- bag enabled Front-passenger front air- bag disabled1 E ISO/R1 X IL X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight cate- gory and/or size category. 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front- passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Overview of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approximately 15 months) Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air- bag enabled Front-passenger front air- bag disabled1 E ISO/R1 X IL D ISO/R2 X IL C ISO/R3 X IL X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight cate- gory and/or size category. 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front- passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Overview of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight category I (9‑18 kg and approximately 9 months to 4 years) Size class Equipment Front-passenger front air- bag enabled Front-passenger front air- bag disabled1 D ISO/R2 X IL C ISO/R3 X IL B ISO/F2 IUF IUF B1 ISO/F2X IUF IUF 50 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Size class

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 59 · Applies to: 453

Equipment Front-passenger front air- bag enabled Front-passenger front air- bag disabled1 A ISO/F3 IUF IUF X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight cate- gory and/or size category. IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Univer- sal" category in this weight category. 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front- passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Overview of recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems i‑Size identification i‑Size is a standardised securing system for special restraint systems. RThis symbol indicates which seats are suitable for securing an i‑Size child restraint system in accordance with UN-R129 (Y page 48). RChild restraint systems which have been approved in accordance with the following may be secured: - UN-R44 in accordance with the ISOFIX tables (Y page 49) - UN-R129 in accordance with the following i‑Size table Front-passenger front air- bag enabled Front-passenger front air- bag disabled1 i‑Size child restraint sys- tem i-UF i‑U i-UF Suitable for a forward-facing i‑Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front- passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. i-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing i‑Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. Installing an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on the front passenger seat G WARNING For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys- tems, where the child is secured using the integrated seat belt of the child restraint system, the permissible gross weight of the child and the child restraint system is 33 kg. If the child together with the child restraint system weighs more than 33 kg, Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 51

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systems

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 60 · Applies to: 453

with integrated seat belt no longer offer

sufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size

child seat securing systems may be over-

loaded and will not be able to restrain the

child, for example, in the event of an

accident. This poses an increased risk of

injury or even fatal injury.

If the child together with the child

restraint system weighs more than 33 kg ,

only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint

systems with which the child is secured

with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the

child restraint system with the Top

Tether belt, if available.

Always observe the information on the

weight of the child restraint system:

Rin the installation and operating instruc-

tions provided by the manufacturer for

the child restraint system being used

Ron the label of the child restraint system,

if present

Regularly check that the maximum permis-

sible weight of the child and child restraint

system together is still complied with.

When fitting a child restraint system, be

sure to observe the following:

O be sure to observe the correct use and

the suitability of seats for securing a

child restraint system.

ISOFIX child seat securing system

(Y page 49)

i‑Size child seat securing system

(Y page 51)

O be sure to observe the installation and

operating instructions provided by the

manufacturer for the child restraint

system being used.

When fitting an ISOFIX child

restraint system, also observe the follow-

ing:

O For certain child restraint systems in

weight category II or III, there may be

restrictions on the maximum size set-

ting, e.g. due to possible contact with

the roof.

O The child restraint system must not be

put under strain between the roof and

the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing

the wrong direction.

ISOFIX securing rings ; i-Size securing rings Before every trip, make sure that the ISOFIX child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings. X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system on both securing rings of the vehicle. Securing Top Tether If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: Top Tether can reduce the risk of injury. The Top Tether belt provides an additional connection between the child restraint sys- tem secured with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle. 52 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 61 · Applies to: 453

luggage compartment floor. X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt ? back over the head restraint, keeping it as central as possible, into the luggage compartment through loop :. X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. Ensure that: RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown. RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always com- ply with the child restraint system man- ufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Disabling or enabling the front passenger front airbag G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air- bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot per- form its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dash- board. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. You may only transport a child on the front-passenger seat if they are seated in a suitable rearward or forward-facing child restraint system. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front- passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 53

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

the front-passenger seat. Further informa-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 62 · Applies to: 453

tion can be found under "Problems with the front-passenger front airbag deactivation system" (Y page 191). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is on. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoul- der belt guide on the child restraint sys- tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly. Additionally, always observe the infor- mation on suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If you use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, you must disable the front-passenger front air- bag. Airbag-off switch : for enabling and disa- bling the front-passenger front airbag manually is in the dashboard on the front- passenger side. X Push in airbag-off switch : of the front- passenger front airbag beyond the point of resistance. X To disable the front-passenger front air- bag: turn airbag-off switch : anti- clockwise. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indica- tor lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and stays on when the ignition is switched on (Y page 43). X To enable the front-passenger front air- bag: turn airbag-off switch : clockwise. The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indica- tor lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and stays on when the ignition is switched on (Y page 43). The front-passenger front airbag is gener- ally enabled when the ignition is switched 54 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

on, except when the front-passenger front

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 63 · Applies to: 453

airbag has been disabled manually. When the front-passenger front airbag is disa- bled, the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp on the overhead control panel (Y page 43) lights up continuously when the ignition is switched on. Attaching a child restraint system with the seat belt Notes on the suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint sys- tems Front-passenger seat – notes Notes on child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat RObserve the specific notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys- tems. If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front- passenger front airbag is correct depending on the situation both before and during the journey (Y page 43). Weight category Front-passenger front air- bag is enabled Front-passenger front air- bag is disabled1 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front- passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Category 0: up to 10 kg X U, L Category 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L Category I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L Category II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L Category III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight cate- gory and/or size category. UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems in the "Universal" category in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Travelling safely with children in the vehicle 55

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Notes on rearward-facing and forward-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 64 · Applies to: 453

facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat G WARNING If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front- passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the child can occur. Observe the specific notes on rearward- facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. Warning notice on the front-passenger sun visor Always pay attention to the status of the front-passenger front airbag with the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: RIf you fit a child restraint system to the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the notes on disabling the front- passenger front airbag (Y page 53). RWhen using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- cator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 43). RIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out, the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The front-passenger front airbag may deploy during an acci- dent. Attaching a child restraint system with the seat belt to the front passenger seat When fitting a belt-secured child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always observe the following: O Be sure to observe the installation and operating instructions provided by the manufacturer for the child restraint system being used. O When using a "Universal" or "Semi- Universal" category child restraint system, ensure that it is approved for the vehicle seat. Observe the notes under "Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems" (Y page 55). O The backrest of a forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possi- ble, rest flat against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. O For certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, the maxi- mum size setting may be restricted, for instance due to possible contact with the roof. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. O Never place objects, such as a cushion, under or behind the child restraint system. X Set the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. X Adjust the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. X Fit the child restraint system. The base of the child restraint system must lie fully against the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. 56 Travelling safely with children in the vehicle

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Always make sure that the shoulder belt

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 65 · Applies to: 453

strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the belt outlet. X If necessary, adjust the belt outlet and the front-passenger seat as appropriate. Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may press buttons or switches, for instance. In this way, animals may: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch systems on or off and thereby endanger other road users Furthermore, unsecured animals may be flung around inside the vehicle in the event of an accident or abrupt steering or braking manoeuvre, and thereby injure vehicle occupants. There is a risk of acci- dent and injury. Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always secure animals properly when driving, for instance with a suitable pet carrier. Driving safely Driving safety system limitations ! Make sure you have suitable tyres, so that assistance systems and driving safety systems can work as effectively as possible. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety sys- tems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the pre- vailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehi- cle in front. Drive carefully. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart Centre or a qualified specialist workshop. Braking with ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS controls brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. When you switch on the ignition, the ! warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. It goes out after the engine is started. ABS works from a speed of about 6 km/h, regardless of road surface conditions. ABS intervenes in the case of slippery road sur- faces, even if you only brake gently. X To brake while ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and brak- ing characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safely 57

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the distance warning function

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 66 · Applies to: 453

Useful information If a risk of collision with the vehicle in front is detected, the distance warning function alerts the driver both visually and acoustically. With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehi- cle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the distance warning function can react to sta- tionary obstacles, such as stationary or parked vehicles. Please note G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering The distance warning function may not give warnings in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation and be ready to brake. Always adapt your speed to suit the pre- vailing road and traffic conditions. G WARNING The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and com- plex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning func- tion may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone. The · warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when: Rthe distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient. Rthe vehicle is rapidly approaching a vehicle travelling in front or a stationary object. In this case, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. Detection can be restricted under the fol- lowing conditions: Rthe vehicle is new or service work has been carried out on the system. In this case, observe the information on run- ning-in the vehicle. Rthe sensors are dirty or covered. Rin heavy rain or snow. Rinterference by other radar sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parks. Rthe vehicle travelling in front is narrow, e.g. a motorcycle. Rthe vehicle travelling in front is travel- ling on a different line. Following any damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and operation of the radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. i Observe the notes in the "Limitations of the driving safety systems" section (Y page 57). Activating/deactivating the distance warning function The distance warning function is automati- cally activated when you start the engine. 58 Driving safely

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Press the

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 67 · Applies to: 453

switch. If the distance warning function is deac- tivated, the LED on the switch lights up. On-board computer with colour display: the display shows a message. Using Active Brake Assist Useful information With the help of the radar sensor system, Active Brake Assist can calculate the dis- tance of your vehicle to the vehicle in front. If for several seconds, the distance to the vehicle in front is insufficient for the speed you are driving at, Active Brake Assist alerts the driver visually. If a risk of collision is detected, Active Brake Assist alerts the driver both visually and acoustically. In addition, Active Brake Assist prepares the vehicle for a possible emergency braking manoeuvre. In particularly critical situations Active Brake Assist may brake autonomously. In this case, Active Brake Assist continues to alert the driver both visually and acousti- cally. Please note G WARNING Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic sit- uations. In these cases, Active Brake Assist may: Rwarn or brake for no reason Rnot issue a warning Rnot brake There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation and do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or manoeuvre if necessary. G WARNING Active Brake Assist does not react: Rto persons, bicycles, motorcycles or animals Rto approaching vehicles Rto cross traffic Ron bends As a result, Active Brake Assist cannot intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traf- fic situation and be prepared to brake. G WARNING Severe jolting, for example in the case of a collision, may cause the radar sensors to be misaligned. The function of Active Brake Assist is then impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Deactivate Active Brake Assist. Have Active Brake Assist checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The following requirements must also be fulfilled: Rforward gear is engaged. Rthe parking brake is released. Rthe driving speed is within the suitable speed range. Detection can be restricted under the fol- lowing conditions: Rthe vehicle is new or service work has been carried out on the system. In this case, observe the information on run- ning-in the vehicle. Rthe radio sensors are dirty or covered (Y page 165). Rin heavy rain or snow. Rthere is interference from other radar sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parks. Rthe vehicle travelling in front is narrow, e.g. a motorcycle. Rthe vehicle travelling in front is travel- ling on a different line. Autonomous braking can be cancelled by briefly depressing the accelerator pedal. Driving safely 59

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If the brake lamps are inoperative, deacti-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 68 · Applies to: 453

vate Active Brake Assist. i Observe the notes on "Limitations of the driving safety systems" (Y page 57). Distance warning and forward collision warning with autonomous braking function Method of operation If the distance maintained to the vehicle ahead is insufficient for the speed you are driving at, the · warning lamp lights up. If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of colli- sion while driving, the · warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds. If the driver depresses the brake pedal fast, the braking pressure may be increased to a full brake application. The autonomous braking function may intervene if the driver does not react to the forward collision warning. When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, the collision warning may issue a warning in the following situations: Situation Speed you are trav- elling Vehicles in front 30 - 140 km/h Vehicles coming to a standstill 30 - 140 km/h Stationary vehicles 30 - 80 km/h Other objects or crossing vehicles No warning possi- ble When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: Situation Speed you are trav- elling Vehicles in front 30 - 140 km/h Vehicles coming to a standstill 30 - 140 km/h Situation Speed you are trav- elling Stationary vehicles No intervention possible Other objects or crossing vehicles No intervention possible Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist is automatically activa- ted when you start the engine. Monochrome display: activating/deactivat- ing Active Brake Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 108). Colour display: activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist using the on-board computer (Y page 109). Driving with ESP® G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Within physical limits, ESP® can monitor and improve the driving stability and trac- tion in the following situations: Rwhen pulling away on wet or slippery road surfaces Rwhen braking Rin case of strong crosswinds If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: Rbraking one or more wheels accordingly Radjusting the engine output according to the situation ESP® comprises ETS (Electronic Traction System) and Crosswind Assist. 60 Driving safely

Safety. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 69 · Applies to: 453

they spin. This enables you to pull away or accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. If the ÷ warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is active. If the ÷ warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster, ESP® is intervening. If ESP® intervenes, observe the following points: Rpull away carefully: only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary Radapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Crosswind Assist is then also no longer active. Observe the additional information on indi- cator and warning lamps and display mes- sages. Crosswind Assist recognises suddenly occurring crosswinds and helps the driver to keep the vehicle in the correct lane. The vehicle is stabilised using a targeted and one-sided application of the brakes. Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. Information on EBD (Electronic Brake- force Distribution) EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling character- istics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safely 61

Safety. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Understanding functions of the key

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 70 · Applies to: 453

The following keys are available:

Rfolding key

Rreplacement key with fixed bit

% Unlocks the vehicle

; º smart fortwo: opens the upper

tailgate (press and hold)

; º smart fortwo cabrio: opens the soft

top (press and hold)

= & Locks the vehicle

% Unlocks the vehicle ; & Locks the vehicle = é smart fortwo: opens the upper tailgate (press and hold) = é smart fortwo cabrio: opens the soft top (press and hold) X To unlock centrally: press the % but- ton. The turn signals flash once. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately two minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti- theft alarm system again. X To unlock and open the upper tailgate (smart fortwo): press and hold the º or é button. X To open the soft top to the B-pillar (smart fortwo cabrio): press and hold the º or é button. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The turn signals flash twice. X To activate the double-lock function (for United Kingdom only): press the & button twice. The turn signals flash twice slowly and three times quickly. Opening the door X Press the # button on the key. X Open the door. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately two minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti- theft alarm system again. Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. 62 Correct driver's seat position

Entering and setting up. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Observe the following rules on the correct

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 71 · Applies to: 453

driver's seat position: Rthe driver must be as far away from the driver's airbag as possible (Y page 41). Rthe driver must be wearing seat belt = properly. Rthe driver must be able to depress the pedals properly. Rthe driver must be able to move their legs freely. Rthe driver must be able to reach steering wheel : with their arms slightly bent. Rthe driver must be able to see all the dis- plays in the instrument cluster clearly. Rmove seat backrest ; to an almost verti- cal position. Rsit in a normal upright position. Rthe seat belt must fit snugly across your body. Rthe seat belt must be routed across the middle of your shoulder. Rthe seat belt must be routed in your pel- vic area across the hip joints. Radjust the rear-view and exterior mirrors so that the driver has a good view of the road and traffic. Adjusting the seats Please note G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it could unexpectedly move while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always ensure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the area of movement of the seat when adjusting it. G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical posi- tion. When braking or in the event of an accident, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seatbelt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock Adjusting the seats 63

Entering and setting up. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

the steering wheel when the vehicle is in

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 72 · Applies to: 453

motion. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 41) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 43). Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft posi- tion Seat with a lever Seat with a handwheel To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position, the seat belt must not be fastened. X Lift lever =. X Slide the seat forwards or backwards. The seat engages audibly. Adjusting the seat height (seat with a lever only) X Pull handle ; up or push it down several times. Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a lever) X Pull lever : upwards. X At the same time, move the backrest for- wards or backwards. Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a handwheel) X Turn handwheel ? forwards or back- wards. Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. 64 Adjusting the steering wheel

Entering and setting up. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Make sure that the steering wheel is

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 73 · Applies to: 453

locked before driving off. Never unlock the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. X Fold down lever :. X Set desired steering wheel height 2. X Fold up lever :. X Check that the steering column is locked. Adjusting the mirrors Adjusting the rear-view mirror X Move the rear-view mirror up, down, left or right. Manually setting the rear-view mirror to anti-dazzle mode X Fold lever : forwards. Understanding automatic anti-dazzle mode of rear-view mirror Please note G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita- tion. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the electro- lyte, observe the following: RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin immediately with water. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi- ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Adjusting the mirrors 65

Entering and setting up. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RIf electrolyte comes into contact with

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 74 · Applies to: 453

your skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with elec- trolyte. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. Useful information The rear-view mirror automatically goes into anti-dazzle mode if simultaneously: Rthe ignition is switched on Rincident light from headlamps hits the sensor in the rear-view mirror The rear-view mirror does not go into anti- dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Adjusting the exterior mirrors man- ually G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could mis- judge the distance from road users driv- ing behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. X Move lever : up, down, left or right. Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri- cally In order to adjust the exterior mirrors elec- trically, the ignition must be switched on. X To select the left or right exterior mirror: turn control = left 1 or right 2. X To adjust the exterior mirrors: move con- trol = up, down, left or right. Using the armrest Please note ! Do not lean on the armrest with full force or it could become damaged. 66 Using the armrest

Entering and setting up. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Running-in a new vehicle

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 75 · Applies to: 453

Running-in the engine with due care improves the engine's performance in later years. After 1,500 km, the engine speed can be increased gradually. Also follow the notes on running-in when the engine or parts of the drive train have been replaced. In some drive and driving safety systems, the sensor system resets automatically after vehicle delivery or repairs. Full sys- tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. During the first 1,500 km of the running-in period, note the following: X Drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds. X Avoid high engine loads, such as driving at full throttle. X Drive at a speed that is less than Ô the maximum speed. X Do not use the engine brake to brake. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not depress the accelerator beyond the pressure point (kickdown). X Vehicles with automatic transmission: ideally drive the vehicle in drive program E (Comfort). New brake pads/linings and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Therefore, note the following during the running-in period: X Drive carefully. X Brake more firmly. Starting the engine Please note G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unat- tended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G DANGER Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is haz- ardous to health and results in poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore, never leave the engine running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti- lation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Starting the engine 67

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Carry out regular checks to make sure

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 76 · Applies to: 453

that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. u To insert the key into the ignition lock 1 To switch on the power supply 2 To switch on the ignition 3 To start the engine Manual transmission X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to neutral. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 3. Automatic transmission X Turn the key to position 3. X Shift out of transmission position j. Pulling away Please note G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can impede pedal travel or block a pedal which is depressed. This jeopardises safe operation of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so that they cannot reach the driver's foot- well. Make sure the floormats and carpets are properly secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct the pedals. Do not lay several floormats or carpets on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driv- ing, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driv- ing. 68 Pulling away

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Note the following when pulling away:

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 77 · Applies to: 453

RDo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. RDo not drive with the parking brake applied. RUse caution when pulling away on slip- pery surfaces. RDo not allow tyres to spin. RAvoid excessive engine speeds and full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Note the following on vehicles with auto- matic transmission: RDepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. RPress the release button on the selector lever. RShift the gear selector lever to position h or k. Using the parking brake Please note G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could in particular: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic. Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake. Rchanging the transmission position. Ryou start the vehicle. There is a risk of accident and injury. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of the reach of children. Applying the parking brake X Pull parking brake ; upwards. The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. Releasing the parking brake X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press release button : on parking brake ; and move the parking brake down to the stop. Pulling away 69

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Hill start assist

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 78 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING After a while, hill start assist no longer holds the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist keeps the vehicle in place when driving uphill as soon as the brake pedal is released. Hill start assist is only active in the follow- ing situations: Rwhen pulling away on an uphill slope Rwhen the parking brake is released Rvehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is not in position i RESP® is functioning correctly. X Release the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about one second. X Pull away. Automatic start/stop system Useful information The automatic start/stop system automati- cally switches off the engine when the vehicle stops moving and starts it up again when pulling away. All vehicle systems except the heating or climate control sys- tem remain active during automatic engine switch-off. Indicator lamps of the automatic start/stop system: Rè conditions fulfilled. The engine is switched off. Rç conditions not fulfilled, the stop inhibitor is active. The engine will not stop automatically. The engine stops automatically in the fol- lowing situations: Rthe automatic start/stop system is switched on. Rthe outside temperature and atmospheric pressure is within the range that is suit- able for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating tem- perature. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior has reached the set value. Rthe battery is charged. Rthe windscreen is not misted up (when the climate control system is switched on). Rthe doors and tailgate are closed. Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened. Rreverse gear is not engaged. The engine starts automatically in the fol- lowing situations: Rthe automatic start/stop system is switched off. Rthe clutch pedal is depressed. Rthe brake is depressed. Rthe vehicle is rolling. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior differs from the set temperature. Rthe tailgate is opened. Rthe windscreen is misted up. Rthe battery charge is too low. Switching off the engine automati- cally Manual transmission X Stop the vehicle. X Shift to neutral. X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off. The è indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster. 70 Automatic start/stop system

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Automatic transmission

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 79 · Applies to: 453

X Stop the vehicle in transmission position h or i, even when shifting manually. The engine is switched off. The è indicator lamp lights up in the instru- ment cluster. Starting the engine automatically Manual transmission X Depress the clutch pedal. ! Vehicles with manual transmission: only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. Automatic transmission X Release the brake pedal. Activating/deactivating the automatic start/stop system When the ignition is switched on again, the automatic start/stop system is activated automatically. X Press the switch symbol. The indicator lamp lights up when the automatic start/stop system is deactiva- ted or there is a malfunction. On-board computer with colour display: the display shows a message. Manual transmission Shifting to neutral X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Move the gear lever to position i. Engaging a gear X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Engage a gear. Engaging reverse gear ! Only engage reverse gear with the engine at idling speed and the vehicle stationary. You could otherwise damage the manual transmission. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Select neutral. X smart 66 kW turbo: pull the sleeve on the gear lever upwards. X Push the gear lever back to the right to position k. Automatic transmission Please note G WARNING The vehicle can suddenly accelerate if the engine speed is above the engine idling speed and you then select trans- mission position 7 or C. There is a risk of an accident. Automatic transmission 71

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

When selecting transmission position

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 80 · Applies to: 453

7 or C, always firmly press the

brake pedal; do not accelerate simultane-

ously.

G WARNING

When the engine is switched off, the

automatic transmission shifts into neu-

tral position N. The vehicle may roll

away. There is a risk of an accident.

Always shift to parking position P before

switching off the engine. Secure the

parked vehicle against rolling away by

applying the parking brake.

In position h the transmission automati-

cally selects the gears based on the follow-

ing criteria:

Rselected drive program

Rposition of the accelerator pedal

Rspeed driven

Transmission position display

! Only shift into transmission positions

B, C or A when the vehicle is

stationary. Otherwise, you may damage

the transmission.

Transmission position display ; Drive program display The following transmission positions are available: Rj Park position Position j should not be used to brake the vehicle when parking. To secure the vehicle, apply the parking brake in addi- tion to shifting to transmission position j. Rk Reverse gear Ri Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Rh Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are available. Changing the transmission position j Park position with parking lock k Reverse gear i Neutral h Drive The ignition must be switched on in order to shift the transmission to positions j, i or k. To shift the transmission from position j, you must also depress the brake pedal. X Press release knob :. X Shift the selector lever to the desired transmission position. 72 Automatic transmission

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Maximum acceleration (kickdown)

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 81 · Applies to: 453

To reach maximum acceleration, use kick- down: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts to a higher gear. Selecting drive programs Two drive programs are available with dif- ferent characteristics. The automatic trans- mission switches to drive program E every time the engine is started. Drive program E (Comfort) is characterised by the following: Rcomfortable driving style Roptimum fuel consumption through early upshifting Rdriving at low engine speeds; the wheels are less likely to spin Drive program S (Dynamic) is characterised by the following: Rdynamic, active driving style Rlate upshifting Rpossibly higher fuel consumption X Press program selector button :. The letter of the selected drive program appears in the display. Changing gear manually Useful information On vehicles with an automatic transmis- sion, you can shift gears manually using the selector lever or shift paddles. If it is permissible, the automatic transmission shifts to the next highest or next lowest gear. When manual shifting is activated, the cur- rent gear is shown in the display. Two options are available for manual shift- ing: Rpermanent manual gearshifting Rshort-term manual gearshifting (vehicles with Sleek Style package) Permanent manual gearshifting Activating X Shift the gear selector lever to position h. X Push the selector lever to the left. Deactivating X Push the selector lever to the right. Automatic transmission 73

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Short-term manual gearshifting (vehi-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 82 · Applies to: 453

cles with Sleek Style package) Activating X Shift the gear selector lever to position h. X Pull shift paddle : or ;. The short-term setting remains active for a certain length of time. Under certain condi- tions this minimum amount of time is increased, e.g. when driving up a steep slope. Deactivating X Pull and hold shift paddle ;. Shifting with the selector lever Shifting up X Push the selector lever in the q direc- tion. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Shifting down X Push the selector lever in the ± direc- tion. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. When coasting, the automatic transmission shifts down. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine dam- age by not shifting down. Shifting with the shift paddles (vehicles with Sleek Style package) Shifting up X Pull shift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Shifting down X Pull shift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. When coasting, the automatic transmission shifts down. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine dam- age by not shifting down. 74 Automatic transmission

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the turn signals

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 83 · Applies to: 453

The ignition must be switched on in order to use the turn signals. X To indicate: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 (right) or 2 (left) past the point of resistance. X To indicate briefly: press the combina- tion switch briefly to the point of resist- ance. The turn signal flashes three times. Driving economically Notes on economical driving H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci- entists believe to be principally respon- sible for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road condi- tions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emissions by driving carefully and hav- ing it serviced regularly. i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC docu- ment (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). This document is delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were in each case based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with Euro 6 standard, in accordance with Regula- tion (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. Recommendations for driving economically: Rensure that the tyre pressures are correct Ravoid unnecessary loads Rwarm up the engine while driving at low engine speeds Rvehicles with manual transmission: change to a higher gear in good time Rvehicles with automatic transmission: drive the vehicle in drive program E (Comfort) Raccelerate the vehicle moderately Rmaintain an overview of the traffic situa- tion and drive with care Rrelease the accelerator pedal in good time Rallow the vehicle to coast without using the brakes Rhave maintenance work carried out at the specified service intervals H Environmental note Avoid excessive engine speeds. This unnecessarily increases the fuel con- sumption of your vehicle and harms the environment as a result of increased emissions. Driving economically 75

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Monitoring the rev counter

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 84 · Applies to: 453

Rev counter and dashboard clock Rev counter : with dashboard clock ; can be adjusted to the left or right. Overrevving range The overrevving range of the engine is shown with dashed lines in the orange marking of rev counter :. The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the overrevving range is reached. X Regularly check the engine speed while driving. X If a high engine speed is displayed, shift up a gear. Gearshift recommendations The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. Monochrome display (manual transmission) Monochrome display (automatic transmission, manual gearshift) Colour display (manual transmission) Colour display (automatic transmission, man- ual gearshift) X Depending on gearshift recommenda- tion :, shift up or down a gear. 76 Driving economically

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Understanding the eco score display

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 85 · Applies to: 453

in the on-board computer Useful information The eco score display provides information on how to drive economically. A higher percentage indicates a more eco- nomical driving style. The percentage in the eco score display only appears after covering a distance of approx. 400 m. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than four hours, the eco score display will be reset. Monochrome display The percentage of the eco score display increases when you: Raccelerate with moderation Ravoid unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Rfollow gearshift recommendations in the display Colour display The percentage in the eco score display is calculated using the following categories: Raccelerate: the value increases with moderate acceleration. Ranticipatory: the value increases when unnecessary acceleration and decelera- tion is avoided. RVehicles with manual transmission: shift: the value increases when gear- shift recommendations in the display are followed. Using the eco score display in the smart Media-System Calling up the eco score menu X Select Vehicle > eco score. Evaluating the current trip X Select Current trip. Evaluation information and values are calculated. The following rating information and values appear: RBar graphs for accelerate, anticipa‐ tory and shift RBar graphs for Speed and Anticipation RDistance covered RTotal eco score as a percentage Saving the current trip X Select Current trip > Save. X Select the category under which you want to save the trip. The values for the current trip will be added to the category selected and the current trip will be reset. In the instru- ment cluster, the trip computer values will be returned to "From reset". The values for the current trip will be added to the category selected and the current trip will be reset. In the instru- ment cluster, the values for the "From start" trip computer and eco score dis- play will be reset. Driving economically 77

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Comparing the current trip with the

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 86 · Applies to: 453

saved trips from a category

Last trip saved in this category ; Average value for the category = Best trip in the category X Select Current trip > W > Compare. X Select a category. A comparison of the values for the cur- rent trip with the values of the selected category appears. X Select comparison value :, ; or =. The current trip is compared to the respective comparison value from the category. Resetting the current trip data X Select Current trip > Reset. X Select Yes. In the instrument cluster, the trip com- puter values will be returned to "From reset". In the instrument cluster, the values for the "From start" trip computer and eco score display will be reset. Activating/deactivating eco score after a trip X To activate: select Current trip > W > Show eco score after trip. X To deactivate: select Current trip > W > Hide eco score after trip. Displaying eco score for saved trips in a category X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips. X Select a category. eco score displays the comparison values. eco score contains the following compari- son values for each category: RSummary RLast value RAverage value RBest value For the category Last trip saved you can choose from various types of evalua- tions. Types of evaluations: RSummary RDetailed report Renaming an eco score category At least one trip must be stored in the respective category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Rename this cate‐ gory. Resetting the eco score of a category At least one trip must be stored in the respective category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Reset this cate‐ gory. Braking correctly Please note G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking dis- tance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an acci- dent. 78 Braking correctly

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 87 · Applies to: 453

Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road sur- face in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Braking on steep downhill gradients The engine's braking effect reduces the load on the brake system. X On long and steep downhill gradients, downshift to a lower gear in good time Braking on wet road surfaces There may be a delayed brake response when driving on wet roads, after driving through a car wash or after driving through deep water. X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. X Brake more firmly. Braking on salt-treated roads When driving on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This increases the vehicle's braking distance. X In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while pay- ing attention to the traffic conditions. X Brake carefully at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning Depending on driving style and tyre tread depths, aquaplaning can occur on the road. Adapt your driving style as follows: X Reduce the speed. X Brake carefully. X Avoid sudden steering movements. X Avoid tyre ruts. Fording ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum per- missible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise dam- age the engine, the electronics or the transmission. Observe the following when driving through standing water: X Do not drive through water that is higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body. X Drive at walking pace. Winter driving G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road sur- face in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skidding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or suffi- cient ventilation is not possible, poison- ous exhaust gases such as carbon monox- ide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets Winter driving 79

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 88 · Applies to: 453

injury. If you have to leave the engine running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle free of snow. Open a window on the leeward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. X Before the start of winter, have the vehi- cle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Use winter tyres and, if applicable, snow chains. X Drive carefully and avoid sudden accel- eration, turning and braking on slippery road surfaces. X Do not use cruise control. X If the vehicle skids, take corrective steer- ing actions to counteract the movement. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the vehicle skids, shift the transmission to position i. X Do not use the outside temperature dis- play as a way to determine if conditions are icy. X Observe the road surface. Lane Keeping Assist Please note G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly detect lane markings. In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: Rissue an unnecessary warning Rnot issue a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or accel- erate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Lane Keeping Assist issues an acoustic and visual warning when a vehicle uninten- tionally leaves the lane. Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera which is located on the windscreen behind the rear- view mirror. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehicle in its lane. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and staying within the lane. Lane Keeping Assist could be impaired or fail to respond under the following condi- tions: Rpoor visibility Rstrong glaring light Rdirty windscreen in the camera area Runclear or broken lane markings Rvery narrow and winding roads Rhighly variable shade conditions on the road When the turn signal is set, warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. No warning is given in the following situa- tions: Rwhen crossing a lane marking quickly Rat speeds below 70 km/h On-board computer with monochrome dis- play: the ¸ and ¤ symbols in the dis- play indicate the status of Lane Keeping Assist: R¸: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes are not detected due to external causes. No warning is given when the vehicle leaves the lane. R¤: speed is above 70 km/h and the system is able to detect lane markings. A warning is given if the vehicle uninten- tionally leaves the detected lane. On-board computer with colour display: The ¸ symbol in the display indicates the status of Lane Keeping Assist: R¸ lights up white: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes are not detected due to 80 Lane Keeping Assist

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

external causes. No warning is given

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 89 · Applies to: 453

when the vehicle leaves the lane. R¸ lights up green: speed is above 70 km/h and the system is able to detect lane markings. A warning is given if the vehicle unintentionally leaves the detec- ted lane. Activating and deactivating Lane Keeping Assist X Press the switch. When Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated, the LED on the switch lights up. On-board computer with colour display: the display also shows a message. When the ignition is restarted, the last set- ting of Lane Keeping Assist is retained. Cruise control and limiter Please note G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and this differs from your current speed, the vehi- cle will accelerate. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Before you call up the stored speed, pay attention to traffic conditions. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Cruise control is used in order to drive at a constant speed for a prolonged period. The limiter helps to avoid exceeding a stored speed. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle in a safe manner, controlling the vehicle speed and braking in good time. If there is a change of drivers, inform the new driver of the speed stored. The two driver assist systems require the following: Rfavourable weather and good visibility Rgood road and traffic conditions The cruise control and limiter systems do not brake automatically. Rreduce the vehicle speed by applying the brakes Ron long and steep downhill gradients, downshift to a lower gear in good time Speed regulation is cancelled when the fol- lowing occur: Rbraking (including the parking brake) RESP® intervention On downhill gradients or when accelerating briefly, cruise control may interrupt speed regulation. Afterwards, the set speed is applied again. On downhill slopes, the limiter can exceed the set speed. In this case, the stored speed flashes in the display and a warning tone sounds. Cruise control is ready for use at speeds above 30 km/h. With the limiter, speeds of 30 km/h and over can be set as the maxi- mum speed. Cruise control and limiter cannot be activa- ted at the same time. Cruise control and limiter 81

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Activating cruise control or the lim-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 90 · Applies to: 453

iter X Press top (cruise control) or bottom (lim- iter) of button :. The ¯ (cruise control) or È (lim- iter) button appears in the instrument cluster display. Storing the current speed X Press the ® button ;. Limiter: the stored speed appears next to the È symbol in the instrument clus- ter display. Cruise control: the stored speed appears next to the ¯ symbol in the instru- ment cluster display. Adjusting the stored speed X Press the ® button ; or the g button until the desired speed is reached. Interrupting cruise control and the limiter X Press the ± button ?. The stored speed can be accessed again later. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off. Calling up the stored speed X Press the ° button =. X Cruise control: release the accelerator pedal. Deactivating cruise control or the limiter X Press button : to the OFF centre posi- tion. The ¯ or È symbol in the instru- ment cluster display goes out. The stored speed is deleted. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off. Refuelling Refuelling notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and explosion by improper handling of fuel. You must avoid fire, naked flames, smok- ing and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition before refuelling and, if present, switch off the auxiliary heating. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Be sure to avoid swallowing fuel or let- ting it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe the fuel vapours in. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. Keep the doors and windows closed while refuelling. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following points: RImmediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, rinse your eyes with clean water 82 Refuelling

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

immediately. Consult a doctor without

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 91 · Applies to: 453

delay.

RConsult a doctor without delay if you

swallow fuel. Do not induce vomiting.

RImmediately change out of clothing

that has come into contact with fuel.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with

a petrol engine. Do not switch on the

ignition if you accidentally refuel with

the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will

enter the fuel system. Even small

amounts of the wrong fuel can result in

damage to the fuel system and the

engine. Notify a qualified specialist

workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel

lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with

at least 95 RON, which conforms to the

European standard EN 228 or E DIN or an

equivalent specification.

Fuel of this specification may contain up

to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable

for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your

vehicle using E10 fuel.

Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 can

lead to increased wear as well as damage

to the fuel system, engine and exhaust

system.

! Never refuel using:

Rdiesel

Rpetrol with more than 10% ethanol by

volume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100

Rpetrol with more than 3% methanol by

volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100

Rpetrol with additives containing metal

Do not mix such fuels with the fuel rec-

ommended for your vehicle.

In accordance with European standard

EN 16942, the following compatibility indi-

cators apply to your vehicle:

For petrol with a maximum ethanol con- tent of 5% by volume ; For petrol with a maximum ethanol con- tent of 10% by volume You can find the compatibility indicators in the following places: Ron the vehicle on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap (Y page 84) Rthroughout Europe on the fuel pump or fuel pump nozzle appropriate for your vehicle Observe the information on sulphur content on the instruction label on the fuel filler flap: ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. ! Operation of the engine with fuel addi- tives added later can cause engine dam- age. Therefore, do not mix any fuel addi- tives with the fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by smart. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. For further information on recommended additives enquire at any smart centre. Refuelling 83

Driving. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 92 · Applies to: 453

can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injec-

tion system could otherwise be blocked

by particles from the fuel can.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on pain-

ted surfaces. You could otherwise damage

the paintwork.

Further information on fuel and fuel quality

(Y page 212).

The available fuel grade in some countries

may be inadequate. In this case, add the

recommended additives. Observe the notes

and mixing ratios specified on the con-

tainer.

The arrow of the 8 symbol in the instru-

ment cluster display shows the position of

the fuel filler cap.

Refuelling

G WARNING

Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and

thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a

risk of fire and explosion.

Before you open the fuel filler cap or take

hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metal-

lic vehicle body. This discharges any

electrostatic charge that may have built

up.

Do not get into the vehicle again during

the refuelling process. Otherwise, elec-

trostatic charge could build up again.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the

refuelling process. There is a risk of creat-

ing an electrostatic charge.

Fuel filler flap ; Fuel type instruction label = Hook X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Open the fuel filler flap in the direction of the arrow. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it from the filler neck. X Hang the fuel filler cap on the hook on the inside of the fuel filler flap. X Completely insert the fuel pump nozzle into the filler neck and refuel. X Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. The fuel may other- wise leak out. Overfilling the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. X Replace the fuel filler cap on the filler neck and turn it clockwise. X Close the fuel filler flap. 84 Refuelling

Driving. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching on the lighting

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 93 · Applies to: 453

Useful information

The driver must ensure that the light set-

tings match the current weather, light and

traffic conditions.

For reasons of safety, smart recommends

that you drive with the daytime driving

lights or dipped-beam headlamps switched

on even during the daytime.

A warning tone sounds if the lights are still

on when you leave the vehicle.

In some countries, operation of the head-

lamps varies due to legal requirements and

non-compulsory stipulations.

Combination switch control ; Marking Activating automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. While the engine is running, the light set- ting is selected automatically according to the brightness of the ambient light. à controls the daytime driving lights, side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. X Turn combination switch control : to the à position. When one or more of the following occurs, the lights are switched off automatically: Rthe engine is switched off Rthe driver's door is opened Rthe vehicle is locked Rthe main-beam headlamps are not switched on when the vehicle is station- ary Switching on the dipped-beam head- lamps X Turn combination switch control : to the L position. The L indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Switching the main-beam headlamps on or off The engine must be running. X Turn the combination switch control to the à or K position. X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam headlamps are switched on. Switching on the lighting 85

Ensuring good visibility. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the headlamp flasher

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 94 · Applies to: 453

X Pull the combination switch in the direc-

tion of arrow 2.

Switching on the side lamps

X Turn combination switch control : to

the T position.

Switching the foglamps and rear fog-

lamp on and off

Only vehicles with front foglamps have the

"Foglamps" function.

Combination switch middle ring ; Marking Switch on the ignition and either the side lamps or the dipped-beam headlamps in order to switch on the foglamps. Start the engine and switch on either the side lamps or dipped-beam headlamps in order to switch on the rear foglamps. X To switch on or off manually: turn combi- nation switch middle ring : to the desired marking: RO Foglamps RR Rear foglamps After releasing, the combination switch middle ring returns automatically to the neutral position. The foglamps and rear foglamps also switch off automatically in the following situa- tions: Rthe lights are switched off Rthe engine is switched off and the control is in the à position Using the cornering light function Only vehicles with the LED & Sensor pack- age are equipped with the "Cornering light function". The cornering light function uses the front foglamps to improve the illumination of the road in the direction in which you are turn- ing, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The following conditions must be fulfilled for the cornering light function to switch on automatically: Rthe dipped-beam headlamps are switched on Rthe vehicle is moving at less than 40 km/h Rthe turn signal indicator is switched on or the steering wheel is turned Adjusting the lighting Adjusting the headlamp range The vehicle load can affect the headlamp range. This can impair visibility, and the headlamps can dazzle oncoming traffic. The ignition must be switched on in order to set the headlamp range. X Turn headlamp range adjuster : to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. On-board computer with colour display: the display shows a message. Positions for the vehicle load: Rg: Driver's seat occupied or driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied R1: Other loading 86 Adjusting the lighting

Ensuring good visibility. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Adjusting the dipped-beam head-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 95 · Applies to: 453

lamps to left-hand or right-hand traffic The symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps are required when travelling in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite side of the road to that in which the vehicle is registered. Unlike the asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps, these headlamps do not dazzle oncoming traffic. Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps provide less illu- mination to the edge of the carriageway. X Open the service cover. X For symmetrical dipped beam: turn the screws of both headlamps as far as they will go to position ±. For asymmetrical dipped beam: turn the screws of both headlamps as far as they will go to position q. X Have the dipped-beam headlamp setting checked at a qualified specialist work- shop. Using the interior lighting Switching the interior lighting on and off The interior lighting goes on when you unlock the doors. The interior lighting switches off in the fol- lowing situations: RA door is opened and 15 minutes have passed. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has been locked and 15 seconds have passed. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has not been locked and 4 minutes have passed. RThe engine has been started. The interior lighting can be activated when a door is open. After closing the doors, the interior lighting goes out. X Press switch : to switch the left-hand reading lamp on and off. X Move switch ; to the desired position. The following settings can be selected: RInterior lighting is switched on. RInterior lighting controlled automati- cally. RInterior lighting is switched off. X Press switch = to switch the right-hand reading lamp on and off. Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour display) On-board computer with colour display: the ambient lighting is set in the on-board computer (Y page 109). Using the windscreen wipers Switching on the windscreen wipers Please note ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. Using the windscreen wipers 87

Ensuring good visibility. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If it is necessary to switch on the wind-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 96 · Applies to: 453

screen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- screen becomes dirty in dry weather con- ditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could dam- age the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. For this reason, you should always switch off the windscreen wipers in dry weather. ! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are free of ice. Otherwise the wiper motor may overheat. Wiper blades are subject to wear and tear. smart recommends replacing the wiper blades twice a year. Worn or damaged windscreen wiper blades cause smearing on the windscreen. On vehicles with a rain sensor, malfunctions may occur as a result of this. Switching continuous wipe on and off : Control for wipe frequency g Continuous wipe, off à Automatic wipe 1 Continuous wipe, slow 2 Continuous wipe, fast î Wiping with washer fluid To operate the windscreen wipers, the igni- tion must be switched on. X Press the combination switch down or up to the desired position. In position 2, the wipe frequency is reduced if the engine is switched off auto- matically. In position 1 or in the à position, the windscreen wipers switch off when the engine is switched off automatically and the driver's door is opened. Automatic wiping (vehicles with rain sensor) The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver is responsible for ensuring unimpaired vision. X Press the combination switch to the à position. In automatic wiping mode, the appropriate wipe frequency is set according to the intensity of the rain. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. Switching on intermittent wiping X Press the combination switch to the à position. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. Wiping with washer fluid X Pull the combination switch in the direc- tion of arrow î. Switching the rear window wiper on/off (smart fortwo) To operate the rear window wiper, the igni- tion must be switched on. X Turn the outer control on the combina- tion switch to the desired position: The following settings can be selected: Rg Rear window wiper, off Rè Rear window wiper, on Rî Wipes with washer fluid 88 Using the windscreen wipers

Ensuring good visibility. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching the rear window wiper

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 97 · Applies to: 453

on/off when in reverse gear (smart

fortwo)

You can switch the "Automatic rear window

wiper when reversing" setting on or off in

the smart Media-System. The rear window

wiper is automatically activated for a short

while when the ignition is switched on, the

window wipers are switched on and reverse

gear is engaged.

X In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐

cle > Settings > Auto rear wipe with

reverse gear.

The selected setting is highlighted.

X Confirm the setting with Done.

Folding the sun visor to the side

Mirror cover ; Bracket = Retaining strap ? Vanity mirror X Fold the sun visor down. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Fold the sun visor to one side Folding the sun visor to the side 89

Ensuring good visibility. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Locking and unlocking the vehicle

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 98 · Applies to: 453

from the inside Using the door handle to unlock the door X Pull door handle :. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unat- tended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. X To lock: press button :. When the doors are locked, indicator lamp ; lights up. X To unlock: press button :. Activating/deactivating the automatic locking feature The activated automatic locking feature locks the vehicle automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is moving. X When the engine is running, press and hold button : for 5 seconds until a tone sounds. Repeat the procedure to deactivate the automatic locking feature. When the automatic locking feature is activated, the locking mechanism engages audibly when you pull away. When the automatic locking feature is deactivated, no sound occurs. Activating the double-lock function For United Kingdom only: the double-lock function prevents the doors from being opened from the inside. G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the 90 Locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

inside. People in the vehicle can no lon-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 99 · Applies to: 453

ger get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not leave any people unsu- pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- dren, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehi- cle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehicle. X Press button : twice. The double-lock function is enabled. Understanding the reversing function Vehicles with automatic operation: the side windows are equipped with an automatic reversing function. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from closing dur- ing automatic operation, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The auto- matic reversing function is only an aid. The driver is responsible for operating the side windows safely. G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin- gers Rwhile adjusting This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Opening and closing the windows Please note G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If some- body becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side win- dow again. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you close a side window again immedi- ately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. Vehicles with automatic operation: the switches for both side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger window on the front-passenger door. The switch on the driver’s door takes precedence. Opening and closing the windows 91

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening and closing the windows

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 100 · Applies to: 453

Vehicles with automatic operation

Left side window ; Right side window Vehicles without automatic operation X To open: press the switch. X To close: pull the switch. Opening and closing windows fully in automatic mode Vehicles with automatic operation: X To open the windows fully, press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. X To close the windows fully, pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. X To stop automatic operation, press the switch again. Using the soft top (smart fortwo cab- rio) Please note G WARNING During opening and closing of the folding top or rear soft top, body parts may become trapped for example, by the roof mechanical system. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that no parts of the body are in the immediate vicinity of moving parts during the closing or opening process. Release the switch immediately if some- body becomes trapped. ! If you are transporting long objects in the vehicle interior, you must make sure that the objects do not press against the folding top when the folding top is closed. When transporting objects which pro- trude at the rear, make sure that they do not lie on the rear soft top fasteners (brackets). When loading the vehicle, make sure that no sharp-edged parts come into contact with the soft top or the rear window. Do not place any flat loads weighing over 75 kg on the rear soft top when it has been lowered. Make sure that the additional brake light is not covered. ! Make sure that the lock openings of the soft-top system are not blocked. Stow the side spars only in the intended stowage compartment in the tailgate. ! Make sure that objects in the luggage compartment are not stacked too high. They could otherwise be damaged when the rear soft top is opened or closed. The procedure for removing, fitting and stowing the side bars is described below. The QR code is a link to a video clip that demonstrates the procedure. 92 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening and closing the soft top

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 101 · Applies to: 453

To open or close the soft top, the ignition must be switched on. X To open: press the switch to position ; until the soft top is in the desired posi- tion. Press switch ; again to fully open the soft top. X To close: press the switch to position : until the soft top is in the desired posi- tion. It is possible to open or close the soft top while driving up to the maximum design speed. In poor weather and at high speeds, it is possible that electric locking when closing is not reliable. If this is the case you must reduce the speed and, if neces- sary, press the switch again to close the soft top. Opening the soft top (using the key) X Press and hold the é button on the key. Removing the side bars X Open the soft top. X Open the doors and tailgate. X To release: slide lever : back. The side bar is unlocked. X Push lever : back again and remove side bars ;. Stowing the side bars G WARNING If you transport the side bars without securing them, they may be thrown around in the event of an accident, brak- ing or sudden changes in direction. There is a risk of injury. Always stow the side bars in the designa- ted stowage well and close the stowage well lid. ! When the rear soft top is lowered, the side support beams could be stolen. Therefore, remove the side support beams and stow them in the luggage compart- ment or close the soft top. ! If you load the stowage space it could be damaged. Never stow heavy objects on the stowage space or sit on it. Please note: Ronly use the stowage space to store the side bars Ralways place both side bars in the stow- age space Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) 93

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Observe the notice on the stowage space.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 102 · Applies to: 453

X Release fastening straps : on the stow-

age space and guide the locking mecha-

nism with your hand until the fastening

straps are released.

X Open cover ;.

X Store the side bars as shown.

Observe markings l and k on the side

bars and the stowage compartment for

the left and right side bars.

Side bar, front left ; Side bar, rear left = Side bar, front right ? Side bar, rear right X Close the cover. The cover must audibly engage. X Secure both fastening straps with ten- sioner : on rear detent ;. The red surfaces at the side must no lon- ger be visible. An audible click can be heard upon engaging. X Close the tailgate. X If the tailgate does not close properly, check if the side bars have been stored as specified. Fitting the side bars G WARNING If the side bars are incorrectly mounted they may become loose during the jour- ney and endanger other road users. There is a risk of accident and injury. Mount the side bars as described. X Open the doors and tailgate. X Release the fastening straps on the stow- age space and guide the locking mecha- nism with your hand until the fastening straps are released. X Open the cover. X Remove the side bars. 94 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Insert the side bar from the stowage com-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 103 · Applies to: 453

partment marked L on the left side at the front end :. X Press down rear end of side bar ; until it engages twice. X Fit the side bar from the stowage com- partment marked R on the right-hand side. Closing the stowage space without the side bars X Move folding mechanism : in the direc- tion of the arrow. X Close cover ;. X Secure both fastening straps with ten- sioner : on front detent ;. The red surfaces at the side must no lon- ger be visible. An audible click can be heard upon engaging. X Close the tailgate. Fitting and removing the draught stop (smart fortwo cabrio) Fitting the draught stop X Open the soft top completely. X Attach recesses : of draught stop = on to hooks ; on the roll bar. X Attach loops A on to hooks ? in the side panelling. Removing the draught stop X Unhook loops A from hooks ? in the side panelling. X Unhook recesses : from hooks ; on the roll bar. Operating the climate control system Useful information The climate control system is only availa- ble when the engine is running. Operating the climate control system 95

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If the climate control system is deactivated,

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 104 · Applies to: 453

the air supply and circulation are switched off. The windows could mist up. You should therefore switch off the climate control system for brief periods only. In air-recirculation mode, only the air inside the vehicle is recirculated and no fresh air is introduced. This is useful in a tunnel or when there are unpleasant odours outside the vehicle. In air-recirculation mode, the windows may mist up more quickly, particularly when the outside tem- perature is low. Therefore, switch on air- recirculation mode only briefly. If the automatic start/stop system switches the engine off, the air inside the vehicle will not be air-conditioned or dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. If the windows mist up, deactivate the auto- matic start/stop system. The engine starts again. smart fortwo cabrio: when the soft top is open, the climate control system is always deactivated. When the temperature is set to maximum cooling, the climate control sys- tem remains activated. The integrated filter in the climate control system keeps out most particles of dust as well as pollen. The filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle inte- rior. For this reason, always observe the interval for replacing the filter. Operating the heating Switching the heating on and off The engine must be running before the heating can be operated. X To switch on: turn control ; clockwise. X To switch off: turn control ; to position g. Setting the temperature X Turn control ? in small increments clockwise or anti-clockwise. Setting the air distribution X Turn control : to the desired position: Rz Demister vents Ra Demister vents and footwell vents RO Footwell vents RN Centre, side and footwell vents RP Centre and side air vents Increasing or decreasing the blower speed X Turn control ; clockwise or anti-clock- wise. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off X To switch on: slide control A to the left to t. X To switch off: slide control A to the right to u. Demisting the windscreen X Turn control : to z. X Turn control ; to position 4. X Turn control ? clockwise as far as it will go. X Slide control A to the right. Use this setting only until the windscreen is clear again. Demisting the rear window When the rear window heating is activated, the exterior mirrors are also heated. X Press button =. The indicator lamp in the button is lit when the rear window heating is activa- ted. 96 Operating the climate control system

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Use this setting only until the rear window

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 105 · Applies to: 453

is clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the inside X Turn control : to z. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the outside X Switch on the windscreen wipers. X Turn control : to z. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Operating the automatic climate con- trol system Switching the automatic climate control system on/off The ignition must be switched on in order to operate the blower. The engine must be running in order to operate all the func- tions of the automatic climate control sys- tem. X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamps below à and ¿ light up. X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp below ^ lights up. Setting the temperature X Move the slider in small increments to the left or right. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained at a constant level. The air dis- tribution and blower speed are regulated automatically. Setting and switching the air distribu- tion off X Press one or more of the buttons. The following options can be selected: R¯ Demister vents RP Centre and side air vents RO Footwell vents Increasing the blower speed X Press the K button. Decreasing the blower speed X Press the I button. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off X Press the À button. The indicator lamp above À lights up when air-recirculation mode is activated. Switching "Cooling with air dehumidifi- cation" on or off The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cools and dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle during warm weather. The engine must be running in order to use "Cooling with air dehumidification". X To switch on: press the K and ¿ button. The indicator lamp below ¿ lights up when the function is activated. In damp weather, only switch off the "Cool- ing with air dehumidification" function briefly. Otherwise the windows can mist up more quickly. Operating the climate control system 97

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Demisting the windscreen

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 106 · Applies to: 453

X Press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp above ¬ lights up when the windscreen is being demisted. Use this setting only until the windscreen is clear again. Demisting the rear window When the rear window heating is activated, the exterior mirrors are also heated. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp above ¤ lights up when the rear window heating is activa- ted. Use this setting only until the rear window is clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the inside X Press the ¿ button. X Press the à button. X If the windows are still misted up, press the ¬ button. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the outside X Switch on the windscreen wipers. X Press the ¬ button. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Adjusting the air vents Please note G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. G WARNING If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant into the vehicle's ventilation system, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire. Never spray these or other agents into the ventilation system. Always have work on the ventilation system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Keep the following rules in mind for optimal climate control: RKeep the air slots between the service cover and windscreen clear of blockages. RDo not cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. ROpen the air vents fully. Opening and closing the air vents X To open 1: turn the vent outwards. X To close 2: turn the vent inwards. Directing the air vents X Turn the air vents upwards, downwards, to the left or to the right as desired. Switching the seat heating on and off G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehi- 98 Switching the seat heating on and off

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

cle occupants with limited temperature

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 107 · Applies to: 453

sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heat- ing repeatedly. ! When the seat heating is switched on, the seat surface can be damaged as a result of objects being placed on the seats, for example, seat cushions, child seats and protective covers not approved by Mercedes-Benz. Ensure that there are no objects on the seat surface when the seat heating is switched on. The seat heating only works when the igni- tion is switched on. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up when seat heating is activated. Using the accessories Using the cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the cigarette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the ciga- rette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter only works when the ignition is switched on. X Press cigarette lighter :. When cigarette lighter : is hot, it pops up automatically. Using the ashtray ! The cup holder in the centre console is not heat resistant. Before placing lit cig- arettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder. Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall into the cup holder. Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam- aged. X To open: lift up cover :. X To close: push down cover :. Using the accessories 99

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 108 · Applies to: 453

X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup holder. Using the 12 V socket X Turn the key to position 1 in the igni- tion lock. X Lift up the cover of socket :. X Connect the device. The socket can be used for accessories up to a maximum draw of 120 W (15 A). If you use the socket for very long periods when the engine is switched off, the 12 V battery may discharge. Fitting and removing the floor mats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopard- ises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floor- mats on top of one another. X Slide the driver's seat backwards. X To install: press securing knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: release securing knobs : from retainers ;. 100 Using the accessories

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Parking

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 109 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could in particular: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic. Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: Rreleasing the parking brake. Rchanging the transmission position. Ryou start the vehicle. There is a risk of accident and injury. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of the reach of children. G WARNING When the engine is switched off, the automatic transmission shifts into neu- tral position N. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Always shift to parking position P before switching off the engine. Secure the parked vehicle against rolling away by applying the parking brake. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its drivetrain could be dam- aged. Parking the vehicle X Apply the parking brake. X Manual transmission: engage first or reverse gear. X Automatic transmission: shift the trans- mission to position j. X Turn the key to position u in the igni- tion lock and remove it. X On steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. X Lock the vehicle. Using the parking aid Useful information ! Pay attention to people and obstacles when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situa- tions. The electronic parking aid gives an acous- tic indication of the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle behind it. The parking aid uses three sensors : in the rear bumper to monitor the area around the vehicle. The parking aid measures the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. If the proximity to the object behind the vehicle Using the parking aid 101

Parking and getting out. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

is less than 1.20 m, a short signal is issued.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 110 · Applies to: 453

If the object is less than 30 cm away, a con- tinuous warning tone is issued. The parking aid might not function cor- rectly under the following circumstances: Rthe vehicle is on uneven terrain Rif there are obstacles below or above the sensor detection range Rthe vehicle is on snow or near objects that absorb ultrasonic waves Rthe vehicle is near strong ultrasonic sources, such as pneumatic hammers If you engage reverse gear while the engine is running, the parking aid is activated. Activating and deactivating the park- ing aid The parking aid is automatically activated when you start the engine. X Press the c switch. When the parking aid is deactivated, the LED on the c switch lights up. Using the reversing camera Please note The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the immediate surroundings. The responsibil- ity for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring or parking. ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the reversing camera checked. ! Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually are, for example: Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch Rthe tail-end of a lorry Rslanted posts Only use the image from the reversing camera as a guide. You may otherwise damage your vehicle and/or the object. Understanding the reversing camera functions ! Pay attention to people and obstacles when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situa- tions. ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the reversing camera checked. The reversing camera is a visual parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the smart Media-System display. Reversing camera : is located above the licence plate in the tailgate. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image in the smart Media-System display. 102 Using the reversing camera

Parking and getting out. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The reversing camera may show a distorted

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 111 · Applies to: 453

view of obstacles or show them incorrectly

or not at all if:

Rthe obstacle is very close to the rear

bumper

Rthe obstacle is underneath the rear

bumper

Rthe obstacle is close to the tailgate han-

dle

Rthe reversing camera is covered by addi-

tional accessories, e.g. a bicycle rack

Rthe reversing camera function is

impaired due to pixel errors

The function of the reversing camera is

limited:

Rif the tailgate is open

Rif there is heavy rain, snowfall or fog

Rif the light conditions are too dark or too

bright

Rif there is fluorescent light shining, e.g.

under fluorescent lamps or LED lighting

Rif the outside temperature changes

quickly

Rif the camera lens is dirty, obstructed or

misted up(Y page 165)

Rif the camera or the rear of your vehicle

is damaged

i The display contrast may be impaired

due to incident sunlight or other light

sources, e.g. if the vehicle is being driven

out of a garage. In this case, pay special

attention.

i The use of the display can be consider-

ably restricted due to pixel errors, for

example. In this case have the display

repaired or replaced.

Guide lines in the display

Useful information

! Objects that are not at ground level

appear further away than they actually

are, for example:

Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked

behind

Rthe drawbar of a trailer

Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch

Rthe tail-end of a lorry

Rslanted posts

Only use the image from the reversing

camera as a guide. You may otherwise

damage your vehicle and/or the object.

Guide lines in different colours show the

distance of obstacles from the rear of the

vehicle. Static guide lines do not change

when the steering wheel is turned. Dynamic

guide lines change depending on the posi-

tion of the steering wheel.

Static: vehicle width including exterior mirrors ; Green, static: approx. 1.50 m = Yellow, static: approx. 0.7 m ? Red, static: approx. 0.3 m A Blue, dynamic: vehicle width including exterior mirrors The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Switching on the reversing camera The ignition must be switched on to use the reversing camera. X In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐ cle > Settings > Rear view camera > Rear camera view settings > Rear cam‐ era view. X Confirm with Done. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the smart Media-Sys- tem display. Using the reversing camera 103

Parking and getting out. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching off the reversing camera

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 112 · Applies to: 453

The reversing camera switches off after driving forwards briefly. Adjusting the reversing camera set- tings X In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐ cle > Settings > Rear view camera > Rear camera view settings. The following settings can be selected: RSwitch Rear camera view on or off. RSwitch Static guidelines on or off. RSwitch Dynamic guidelines on or off. X Select desired settings. X Confirm with Done. Adjusting reversing camera display settings X In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐ cle > Settings > Rear view camera > Image settings. X Adjust the values for Brightness, Satu‐ ration and Contrast. X Confirm the display settings with Done. Locking the vehicle G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unat- tended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. X Press the & button on the key. The turn signals flash twice. Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system Useful information The immobiliser prevents the vehicle from being started without the correct key. It is switched on and off automatically. The anti-theft alarm system triggers a vis- ual and audible alarm if a door, the tailgate or the service cover is opened. The alarm is not switched off, even if, for example, you close the open door that has triggered it. Priming X Close the doors. X Close the tailgate. X Close the service cover. X Press the & button on the key. The alarm system is primed after approx- imately 30 seconds. Deactivating and switching off the alarm X Press the % button on the key. 104 Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system

Parking and getting out. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Overview of the on-board computer

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 113 · Applies to: 453

Please note

G WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you could be distracted

from the traffic situation. This could also

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying

attention to road and traffic conditions

and operate the equipment with the vehi-

cle stationary.

G WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or

malfunctioned, you may not recognise

function restrictions relevant to safety.

The operating safety of your vehicle may

be impaired. There is a risk of an acci-

dent.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle

checked at a qualified specialist work-

shop immediately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is

impaired, you must park the vehicle safely

as soon as possible. Consult a qualified

specialist workshop.

Display messages and displays in the

instrument cluster are only shown for cer-

tain systems. Vehicle owners and drivers

are responsible for ensuring that the vehi-

cle is operating safely. A vehicle which is

not operating safely can cause an accident.

The display shows the outside temperature

on the far right in the header. Drivers must

pay special attention to road conditions

when temperatures are around freezing

point. Changes in the outside temperature

are displayed after a short delay.

After opening the door, the on-board com-

puter is activated for approximately

15 minutes. To permanently activate the

on-board computer, the ignition must be

switched on.

Monochrome display overview

Time ; Vehicles with automatic transmission: drive program = Vehicles with automatic transmission: gearshift recommendation ? Transmission display A Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp B Outside temperature display and black ice warning Ò C Trip meter, current fuel consumption, service display D Tyre pressure monitor E Fuel gauge F eco score display, reserve fuel display G Brake light failure warning lamp H Total distance recorder I Cruise control, limiter When the vehicle is stationary or up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display shows the current fuel consumption as a numerical value in l/h. Overview of the on-board computer 105

Operating the on-board computer. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Colour display overview

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 114 · Applies to: 453

Time

; Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp

= Digital speedometer

? Outside temperature display with black

ice warning Ò

A Display field for display messages,

menus and lists

B Reserve fuel display

C Fuel level

D Transmission display

E Cruise control, limiter

Calling up displays

Calling up displays (monochrome dis-

play)

Monochrome display

; Buttons on the multifunction lever

X To scroll forward at menu level, briefly

press the ´ button on multifunction

lever.

X To directly call up the trip meter, press

and hold the ´ button on multifunc-

tion lever.

X Press and hold a on the multifunction

lever to reset the values.

The following displays can be called up one

after another:

Rtrip meter

Rcurrent fuel consumption

Rservice due date

Rsetting the time

Rrestarting the tyre pressure monitor

Calling up displays (colour display)

Calling up displays

Colour display ; Left control panel X Briefly press 9 or : on left control panel ;, to scroll forwards or backwards. X Press and hold 9 or : on left con- trol panel ;, to directly call up the Dis‐ tance display. The following displays can be called up one after another: RDistance RTrip computer from start 106 Calling up displays

Operating the on-board computer. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RTrip computer from reset

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 115 · Applies to: 453

Reco score from start

RFuel consumption

RCoolant temperature

RMessages and service

RSettings

RDigital speedometer

Distance display

Trip meter

; Total distance recorder

Trip computer display

Elapsed time

; Distance

= Average speed

? Average fuel consumption

The data in the from start menu refers to

the start of the journey, whilst the data in

the from reset menu refers to the last time

the submenu was reset.

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the from start values

in the instrument cluster are reset. The eco

score display is also reset automatically.

eco score display

The eco score display provides feedback on

how economical the driver's driving behav-

iour is (Y page 77).

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the eco score display

will be automatically reset.

When the eco score display is reset, the

from start trip computer is also reset.

Fuel consumption display

The display shows the fuel consumption

over the previous 15 minutes.

When the vehicle is stationary or up to a

speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display

shows the current fuel consumption as a

numeric value in l/h. If the unit of meas-

urement for distance is set to miles, the

display shows two dashes.

Coolant temperature display

The display shows the current coolant tem-

perature. If this rises above 110 †, then the

display shows a display message.

Messages and service display

Message memory ; Next service due date The display shows the number of display messages in the message memory and the next service due date. ¯ indicates a minor service. ° indi- cates a major service. Calling up displays 107

Operating the on-board computer. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

To show the display messages, the ignition

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 116 · Applies to: 453

must be switched on. X Press a to scroll through the display messages. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist workshop. Digital speedometer display The display shows the digital speedometer. The digital speedometer in the header is hidden. United Kingdom only: the digital speedom- eter in the header continues to be dis- played. Setting values Setting values (monochrome display) Setting the time X Press ´ repeatedly until ° is shown next to the time. X Press a until the hour display flashes. X Set the values. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist X Press ´ several times until Ä and ° are displayed. X Press a until ON or OFF appears below Ä. The ^ indicator lamp lights up when Active Brake Assist is deactivated. Resetting values The trip meter display and eco score dis- play can be reset. X Scroll to the desired display. X Press a for three seconds. Setting values (colour display) Setting values X Press 9 or : to scroll to Settings. X Press 9 or : to scroll to the desired menu. X Press 9 or : to set the desired value. X Press a to confirm. Resetting values To reset the values in the respective dis- plays, select the following: X Press a. X Select yes and press a to confirm. Setting the time X Select Settings > Time > Set the time. X Set the values. Vehicles with smart Media-System: the time and time format are set in the smart Media-System. Setting the time format X Select Settings > Time > Time format (12/24 h). X Set the value. Adjusting the instrument lighting X Select Settings > Display > Display/ switch brightness. X Set the value. 108 Setting values

Operating the on-board computer. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Displaying the digital speedometer in

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 117 · Applies to: 453

the header X Select Settings > Display > Digital speedometer. X Select the Disp. addit. dig. speedo. function. The digital speedometer is displayed in the header. UK only: the digital speedometer in the header cannot be hidden. Setting the unit for speed in the digital speedometer X Select Settings > Display > Digital speedometer > Unit. X Set the value. The following values are set: RDigital speedometer display RDigital speedometer in the header UK only: only the display unit of the digital speedometer is set. Setting the unit of measurement for distance X Select Settings > Display > Units of distance. X Set the value. Setting the temperature unit of meas- urement X Select Settings > Display > Units of temperature. X Set the value. Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist The ignition must be switched on in order to set Active Brake Assist. X Select Settings > Active Brake Assist > on or off. Information on Active Brake Assist (Y page 59). Starting the tyre pressure monitor X Select Settings > Tyre pressure moni‐ tor. Information on the tyre pressure monitor (Y page 160). Switching ambient lighting on/off X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > On. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > Brightness. X Set the value. Setting the language X Select Settings > Language (Language). X Set the value. Setting values 109

Operating the on-board computer. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating and setting the smart

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 118 · Applies to: 453

Audio-System

smart Audio-System overview

G WARNING

If you operate information and communi-

cation equipment integrated in the vehi-

cle when driving, you could be distracted

from the traffic situation. This could also

cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when the

traffic situation permits. If you cannot be

sure of this, stop the vehicle paying

attention to road and traffic conditions

and operate the equipment with the vehi-

cle stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements

for the country in which you are currently

driving when operating the smart Audio-

System.

Number keys 1 - 6 ; C Previous station or track = USB1 connection ? D Next station or track A % Goes back one menu level higher B Control for menu selection and station list, 9 button C USB2 port D Ã Telephone menu to accept or reject calls E ª System settings F 8 Mute G Õ Plays back media from external data storage media H $ Switches on the radio and selects the waveband I External audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) J Volume control, Ü button K F Sets the radio text Operating and setting the smart Audio-System X To switch on or off: press Ü. X To scroll through menus: turn control B. X To select menu options: turn control B and press the 9 button. X To navigate to the next-highest folder: press the % button. X To set values: turn control B and press the 9 button. X To increase or decrease the volume: turn control J. Using external devices Useful information You can connect the following external devices: RUSB devices, iPods® and MP3 players (USB port) RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) RBluetooth® devices, such as mobile phones External devices can be charged at USB ports = and C when the ignition is switched on. It is better to use USB port = for charging as it supplies a higher charge current. To charge an external device remove the cover on USB port =. 110 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

Using the smart Audio-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Removing and fastening the cover of

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 119 · Applies to: 453

the USB1 port X To remove: turn the cover anti-clockwise using handle :. X Move the cover into position ;. X Remove the cover. X To secure: place the cover in position ;. X Turn the cover clockwise using han- dle :. Adjusting the system settings Setting the system language X Press the ª button. X Select Language. The list of languages appears. X Select the language. Switching the time on/off X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select ON or OFF. Setting the time X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select Set Time. X Set the time. Setting the time format X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select Format. Select one of the following time formats: RAm/Pm R24hr Adjusting the audio settings Adjusting the sound X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Sound. Select the desired sound setting: RBass: adjusts the bass. RTreble: adjusts the treble. RBal.: adjusts the surround sound (bal- ance) to left or right. Switching the bass boost on/off (vehi- cles without JBL sound system) X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Bass Boost. X Select ON or OFF. Resetting audio settings X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Audio Default. X Select Yes. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys- tem) X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Speed Vol.. X Select the desired level. The higher the level, the higher the vol- ume will be at increasing road speeds. Operating and setting the smart Audio-System 111

Using the smart Audio-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Listening to the radio

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 120 · Applies to: 453

Switching on the radio X Press the Ü button. X Press the $ button. The smart Audio-System receives data transmitted via the Radio Data System (RDS). Setting the waveband X Press the $ button repeatedly until the desired waveband appears. If available, you can switch between the following wavebands: RFM1 RFM2 RDR1 (digital radio) RDR2 (digital radio) RAM Selecting stations manually FM and AM waveband X Press the D or C button to set the desired frequency. Digital radio frequency range X To select the desired station, press the D or C button. Setting a station from the station list X Press a in radio mode. The station list appears. X Select a station. X Press a to confirm. Updating the station list X Press the $ button until you hear a tone. Storing a station X Select the waveband. X Set the station. X Press a number key 1 to 6 until you hear a tone. The station set for this waveband will be stored on the button you have pressed. Selecting a stored station X Select a waveband. X Press a number key for the stored station. Switching traffic announcements on/off X Press the ª button. X Select Radio. X Select TA. X Select ON or OFF. Interrupting a traffic announcement X During a traffic announcement, briefly press %. Displaying radio text in FM radio X Press the F button. If radio text is available, it will be dis- played. Digital radio (if available) Information on DAB i Any electronic devices taken into the vehicle may seriously impair radio and DAB radio reception. Digital radio or DAB (Digital Audio Broad- casting) is a digital transmission standard optimally designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Several programmes are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on a single frequency. Some stations only transmit programmes at cer- 112 Listening to the radio

Using the smart Audio-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

tain times. If you have selected a pro-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 121 · Applies to: 453

gramme that has subsequently been removed from the ensemble, it will no lon- ger be received. You will continue to receive the other programmes in the ensemble. Select either a different pro- gramme or a different ensemble. i DAB cannot be received everywhere in Europe. Displaying radio text This function provides additional data transmitted in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). Besides displaying the artist and track names, information on the current programme may also be available. X Press the F button. X Select Radio text. The î dot shows that radio text is acti- vated. Setting alerts If this function is activated, certain pro- gramme categories allow another broadcast to interrupt the current audio playback. Numerous categories can be selected, such as news, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is that broadcasters process the relevant informa- tion. This function is only available in cer- tain countries. X Call up the setup menu (Y page 111). X Select Radio > DR Interrupt… > Desired category. The î dot shows the active settings. i Several categories can be selected. Repeat the procedure if necessary. Displaying the EPG EPG (Electronic Program Guide) is available in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). If the station supports EPG, you can use the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) to dis- play the current and the following two radio programmes. At the very least, the programme overview contains the name, time and length of each programme. X Press the F button. X Select EPG. X Select the desired station. Switching on Intellitext™ If the station supports Intellitext™, you can have additional information displayed, such as news, headlines, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is that broadcasters process the relevant information. Intellitext™ is only available in certain countries. X Press the F button. X Select Intellitext. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Useful information The Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone must be compatible with the smart Audio-Sys- tem. Overview of compatible mobile phones: http://www.smart.com/connect. To make a call, Bluetooth® must be activa- ted on the mobile phone and the smart Audio-System. Once outside the Bluetooth® reception range, the connection is terminated auto- matically. To clearly identify a mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phone X Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Search for devices. Using a mobile phone 113

Using the smart Audio-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switching on the Bluetooth® function of

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 122 · Applies to: 453

the smart Audio-System X Press the à button. X Turn control B to Bluetooth and confirm with 9. X Turn control B to ON and confirm with 9. The î dot shows the active setting. Authorising a mobile phone on the smart Audio-System X Press the à button. X Select Scan devices. The system searches for available mobile phones and displays them in a list. X Select a mobile phone confirm with 9. X Authorise the mobile phone with the smart Audio-System. The following options are available: Rif a code appears in the smart Audio-Sys- tem display and on the mobile phone, confirm it on the mobile phone Rif the code 0000 appears in the smart Audio-System display, enter it and con- firm it on the mobile phone A maximum of five mobile phones can be authorised. However, only one authorised mobile phone can be connected with Blue- tooth® at a time. Loading and updating the phone book X Press the à button. X Select Settings > PB download. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- tion on the mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, the phone book and call lists will be trans- ferred after you connect. Removing a mobile phone from the list (de-authorising) X Press the à button. X Select Del. device. Authorised mobile phones are displayed. X Select the mobile phone to be deleted. X Select Yes. After de-authorisation, the Bluetooth® con- nection to the mobile phone is no longer established automatically. Connecting another authorised mobile phone X Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phone X Press the à button. X Select Sel. device. All authorised mobile phones are dis- played. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by a dot. X Select the desired mobile phone from the list. Setting the sound Adjusting the call volume X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Volume > Call. X Select the value. Switching the smart Audio-System ringtone on and off X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Ringtone. X To switch on: select Car. X To switch off: select Phone. Adjusting the ringtone volume X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Volume > Ring. X Select the value. Telephone operation Calling a contact from the phone book To call a contact in the phone book, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be imported into the smart Audio-System. 114 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Audio-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Press the à button.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 123 · Applies to: 453

X Select Phonebook. X Select the contact. The details for the contact are displayed. X Select the desired phone number. X Press the 9 button. Dialling a phone number X Press the à button. X Select Dial a number. An input screen appears. X Enter the number. X Press the 9 button. X Select ;. Using call lists to call contacts To call a contact in a call list, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be impor- ted into the smart Audio-System. X Press the à button. X Select Call List. X Select Dialled, Received or Missed. X Select an entry from the list. Calling the last number dialled X Press and hold the à button until the call is established. Accepting a call X Press the à button. or X Briefly press the button on the steering wheel. Rejecting a call X Press and hold the à button. or X Press and hold the button on the steering wheel until the call is rejected. Holding and continuing a call X To hold: select Â. X To continue the call: press the 9 button. Transferring a call to the mobile phone X Select z. X To transfer the call back to the smart Audio-System: press the 9 button. Entering numbers or characters during a call X Select #123. X Enter numbers or characters. Ending a call X Press the 9 button. or X Press the button on the steering wheel. Using voice control for the mobile phone Useful information The voice control of the connected mobile phone can be used (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Not all voice con- trol services are supported by the smart Audio-System. Voice control must be activated in the set- tings menu of the mobile phone. Starting voice control of the mobile phone X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Press the button on the steering wheel. A message appears in the display of the smart Audio-System and a tone sounds. Voice control for the mobile phone is active. X Say a command. Using a mobile phone 115

Using the smart Audio-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ending voice control of the mobile

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 124 · Applies to: 453

phone X Press the button on the steering wheel. or X Press the 9 button. Voice control of the mobile phone is ended. Operating external data storage media Useful information You can switch between the following media sources, depending on the type of external data storage media connected: RUSB 1 or iPod® 1 RUSB 2 or iPod® 2 RAUX (external audio equipment) RBT Audio (with Bluetooth® connected device, such as a mobile phone) Selecting external data storage media X Press the Õ button repeatedly until the desired media source appears in the display. Operating a USB device or iPod® Connecting a device X Connect the device to the USB port. The device is activated automatically and the first track is played. Selecting a track X In USB mode, press the 9 button. Available tracks or folders are displayed. X Turn control B. X Press 9 to confirm. Rapid search X Press the 9 button. An entry field appears. X To enter characters, turn control B and press the 9 button. Skipping to the next or previous track X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling. Switching random track sequence on/off X Press the C button. Switching the repeat function on/off X Press the number key. Selecting a track from a category with an iPod® connected X Press the 9 button. X Select a category from the list. Different categories, such as playlists, artists or albums, can be selected, depending on the connected device. Displaying metadata X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. Operating external audio equipment (AUX) Connecting a device X Connect the device to the AUX jack. Use the Õ button to access the media on a connected AUX device. Adjusting the volume of external audio equipment X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select AUX In. 116 Operating external data storage media

Using the smart Audio-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Select one of the following options for the

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 125 · Applies to: 453

volume: RLow RMedium RHigh Bluetooth® device operation Connecting a device X Connect a Bluetooth® audio device the same way you connect a mobile phone with Bluetooth®. Skipping to the next or previous track X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling. Displaying metadata X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. Operating external data storage media 117

Using the smart Audio-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating and setting up the smart

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 126 · Applies to: 453

Media-System

Operating the smart Media-System

Please note

Some functions are restricted while driving.

Controls

:

Switches voice control system on/

off, accepts and ends a phone call

; W Increases the volume

= X Reduces the volume

? smart Media-System display

Voice control system

The following functions are possible using

the voice control system of the smart

Media-System:

Renter a destination for navigation

Rmake a call

Rstart an application

Controls on the smart Media-System

Previous station or track and fast

rewind

; Mute

= Next station or track and fast forward

? Switches to the home screen

A Ü On/off button and volume control

B Touchscreen

Ports on the centre console

Port for external audio equipment (AUX) ; USB port = SD card slot Some devices, for example mobile phones or USB drives, connect with the smart Media- System via USB port ;. External devices with 5 V (1 A) can be charged on USB port ; when the ignition is switched on. 118 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Overview of home screen

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 127 · Applies to: 453

X To call up a function, tap on an area on the home page or on a symbol. The following functions can be selected: R:: to switch to radio or media applica- tion R;: to call up message memory R=: to switch to telephone application R?: to call up the weather forecast for the current location RA: to display time and temperature in full screen or to call up time settings RB: to switch to full screen navigation view RC: next navigation manoeuvre is dis- played RD: to change language, change home page, remove an SD card or switch off the display RE: distance to the destination and esti- mated time of arrival are displayed RF: to view, call up or change favourites RG: to call up the main menu RH: to switch to telephone application If the home page is set so as to display the eco score, you can switch to the eco score application by tapping on the area. When Android Auto™ or MirrorLink® is active, another symbol is displayed on the home page. You can switch to the relevant smartphone screen application by tapping on the symbol. Switching the smart Media-System on/off Switching on automatically X Start the engine. Switching off automatically X Switch off the ignition and open the door. Switching on/off manually X Press the Ü button. Restarting X Press the Ü button five times. The smart Media-System shuts down and restarts. i The restart can take several minutes. During the restart, the audio volume can- not be adjusted. Scrolling through a menu or list on the touchscreen X Touch the touchscreen with your finger. X Swipe up, down, left or right. The selection on the display will then move in the respective direction. Selecting items on the touchscreen X Tap on a menu, an option or an applica- tion with one finger. The menu, the option or the application is launched. Controlling media playback on the touchscreen X Swipe to the left. The next media item is played or dis- played, e.g. the next track or station. X Swipe to the right. Playback is restarted or the previous media item is played or displayed, e.g. the previous track. Media playback can be controlled in the following playback modes: RRadio mode RMusic and audio playback Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 119

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

RImage playback

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 128 · Applies to: 453

RVideo playback Calling up menus X Select Menu on the home screen. X Select one of the following submenus. Submenus: RMultimedia Radio and media playback RNavigation Navigation system RTelephone Mobile phone functions RVehicle Reversing camera, eco score and addi- tional functions RServices TomTom Services RSystem General system settings Confirming settings X Select Done. Settings are accepted. Switching off the display X Select home page > W > Switch off screen. Adjusting the system settings Adjusting the display Setting the daytime brightness X Select System > Display. X Move the Daytime brightness control to the left or right. Setting the night-time brightness X Select System > Display. X Move the Nighttime brightness control to the left or right. Activating automatic switching between day and night mode X Select System > Display > Automatic day/night mode. Displaying day mode constantly X Select System > Display. X Remove the tick for Automatic day/ night mode and Force night mode. Displaying night mode constantly X Select System > Display > Force night mode. Setting the system language X Select System > Language. A list of available languages is displayed. X Select the desired language. i The language of the spoken navigation announcement can be selected independ- ently of the system language. Changing the on-screen keyboard X Select System > Keyboards. X Select the keyboard layout. The following keyboard layouts can be selected: RLatin RGreek RCyrillic For the Latin keyboard layout, it is possi- ble to choose between the ABCD, QWERTY, AZERTY and QWERTZ layouts. Selecting the home screen display Different displays are available for the home page which display up-to-date infor- mation about the applications in the smart Media-System. X Select System > Home page. A selection of home screen displays appears. X Select the desired display. 120 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Resetting to factory settings

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 129 · Applies to: 453

X Select System > Restore factory set‐ tings. X Confirm with Yes. All settings changed in the system return to the default values. All destinations, routes and favourites will be deleted. Setting the time manually X Select System > Clock > Set time. X Change the minutes and hours of the time shown. Activating automatic time adjustment X Select System > Clock > Set time > Auto‐ matic time adjustment. Setting the time format X Select System > Clock > Time format. X Select the time format. The following time formats can be selec- ted: R18:00 R6:00 PM R6:00 Displaying status and information X Select System > Status & Information. X Select the information. The following information can be selec- ted: RVersion information Software and hardware of the Media- System RGPS status Current GPS signal strength RNetwork status Signal strength of the data connection RLicences For free and open-source software used RCopyright For text in the TomTom software used. Adjusting the audio settings Setting the volume X Select System > Sound > Sound levels. X Select the volume setting. The following volume settings can be selected: RMain volume For the whole system RHands-free For the hands-free system RRingtone Ring tone volume RNavigation Volume for the whole navigation sys- tem RComputer voice Volume of the computer-generated voice RApp events Volume of events triggered by apps X Set the desired volume. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle speed (vehicles without JBL sound sys- tem) The speed-dependent volume adjustment function adapts the volume to the current vehicle speed. X Select System > Sound > Speed sensitiv‐ ity volume. X Move the Speed sensitivity volume control to the left or right. The higher the value, the more the vol- ume increases with the speed of the vehi- cle. Volume adjustment is not set using the control but automatically. Adjusting surround sound (balance) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound > Balance > Manual. X Move the control to the desired position. X Confirm with Done. Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 121

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Adjusting the bass and treble

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 130 · Applies to: 453

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Manual.

X Use the control to adjust the bass and

treble separately.

Setting a neutral sound for the bass and

treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Neutral.

Audio is played without increasing the

bass or treble.

Activating/deactivating arkamys® bass

boost (vehicles without JBL sound sys-

tem)

The arkamys® bass boost setting emphasi-

ses the bass during playback.

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Bass

boost Arkamys.

Manual activation of arkamys® bass boost

on models with a JBL sound system is not

possible. Activation functions automati-

cally.

Setting the volume for warning tones

X Select System > Sound > Alerts.

X Move the control to the left or right.

Enabling warning tones when the dis-

play is switched off

X Select System > Sound > Alerts > Keep

audio alerts when screen turned off.

Creating and deleting favourites

Creating favourites

Preset ; Navigation = Radio ? Telephone A Services B Context menu Frequently used settings such as phone contacts and radio stations can be stored as favourites. Six favourites can be stored for each of the following categories: RNavigation RRadio RTelephone RServices X Select Favourites on the home screen. X Select a category. X Select the next empty memory position. A list of possible favourites appears. X Select favourites. Deleting favourites X Select Favourites on the home screen. X Select W > Remove a Favourite. X Delete a favourite. The following options can be selected: RSelect the favourite you wish to delete and confirm with Delete. RTo delete all favourites, select Remove all Favourites. 122 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Listening to the radio

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 131 · Applies to: 453

Switching on the radio

X Select Multimedia > Radio.

Display modes

Useful information

In radio mode there are three different dis-

play modes, in which various settings can

be made:

R"List" display mode (FM and digital radio)

R"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

radio)

R"Presets" display mode

"List" display mode (FM and digital

radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB

radio) and preset group (FM/DAB)

; Selects the previous station

= Selects the next station

? Context menu

A "Frequency" display mode

B "List" display mode

C "Presets" display mode

D Station currently playing

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM radio) and

preset group (FM)

; Increases or decreases the frequency in

small increments

= Station search, forwards or backwards

? Context menu

A Adjusts the frequency manually

B Station currently playing

"Presets" display mode

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio) and preset group (FM/DAB) ; Stored station = Context menu ? Station currently playing Selecting a station "List" display mode X Swipe up or down in the station list. X Tap on the desired station. Listening to the radio 123

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

"Frequency" display mode (AM and FM

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 132 · Applies to: 453

radio) X Slide control on the waveband left or right. Starting a station search X Select C or D in the "Frequency" display mode. Storing a station X Set the station. X Select W > Save as preset. Up to six stations can be stored for each waveband. Displaying radio text Radio text contains information such as current track or latest news. X Select W > Show radio text. Displaying digital radio services X Select W > DR services. X Select one of the following digital radio services: Digital radio services: REPG Programme schedule for the station currently playing RIntellitext Programme information and pro- gramme schedule for the station cur- rently playing RSlide show Displays images to accompany the cur- rent broadcast Other radio settings Searching for alternative frequencies with the best possible reception quality X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > AF (Alternative frequency). Receiving traffic reports (i-Traffic) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Traffic (Traffic program). Displaying the programme type (e.g. classical) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > PTY (Program type). Switching to the corresponding FM sta- tion when digital radio reception is poor X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Simulcast. Displaying information on certain cate- gories (i-Announcement, digital radio only) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Announcement. X Select an i-Announcements category. Updating the station list X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Update radio list. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Please note G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from two- way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics if they are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeop- 124 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ardise the operating safety of the vehicle.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 133 · Applies to: 453

There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radiation can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example if: Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly mounted or is not low-reflection This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low- reflection exterior aerial. Bluetooth® must be enabled both on the mobile phone and on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Enabling and disabling Bluetooth® The mobile phone must be compatible with the smart Media-System. Overview of compatible mobile phones: http://www.smart.com/connect. X Select Settings > Turn Bluetooth on. The setting is marked. Bluetooth® is ena- bled or disabled on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Authorising a mobile phone Authorising a mobile phone for the first time Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart Media-System. X Select Phone menu. X Confirm the display message with Yes. X Enter the security code on the mobile phone or accept access confirmation (see manufacturer's operating instructions). The Enabling Bluetooth message appears. Authorising another mobile phone Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart Media-System. X Select Settings > Manage devices. The list of visible mobile phones appears. X Select the mobile phone from the list. X Enter the security code on the mobile phone or accept access confirmation (see manufacturer's operating instructions). The Bluetooth® connection is established. The Bluetooth® connection will be estab- lished automatically in future. Downloading telephone data automati- cally X Select Settings > Automatically down‐ load phone data. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- tion on the mobile phone. During connection, up to 1,000 contacts are automatically transferred to the smart Media-System. Connecting another authorised mobile phone X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select the mobile phone. The current Bluetooth® connection is ter- minated. The desired mobile phone is connected to the smart Media-System instead. Removing a mobile phone from the list X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Delete device(s). X Select the mobile phone. X Select Delete. Using a mobile phone 125

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Terminating a Bluetooth® connection

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 134 · Applies to: 453

X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Disconnect all devices. X Select the mobile phone. If the mobile phone leaves the Bluetooth® receiver range, the connection is automati- cally terminated. Telephone operation Useful information The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to make a 999 or 112 emergency call: Ra valid and operational SIM card is inser- ted in the mobile phone Ra mobile phone network is available Calling a contact from the phone book X Select Phonebook. X Select the contact. X Select the contact's telephone number. If the phone book contains multiple con- tacts, they can be called up using Find. Dialling a phone number X Select Dial a number. X Enter a number on the keypad. X Select Call. Calling a contact from the call log X Select Call logs. X Select an entry from the list. The call log can be sorted according to calls made, calls received and missed calls using the corresponding receiver icon. Accepting and rejecting an incoming call If a call is incoming, the following informa- tion will appear on the display: Rname of caller, if already in the phone book Rnumber of caller, if name of caller is not already in the phone book RPrivate number, if the caller has the "Hide caller ID" function switched on X To accept the call, select Pick up. X To reject the call, select Refuse. The call will be forwarded to voicemail. Holding and continuing a call X Select W > Put on hold. X To continue the call, select Resume. Transferring a call to the mobile phone X Select W > Handset. Ending a call X Select End call. Using the smartphone screen applica- tion Selecting settings for the smartphone screen Selecting the preferred smartphone screen application If mobile phones support Android Auto™ as well as MirrorLink®, the preferred applica- tion can be selected when a mobile phone is connected. X Select System > Smartphone Screen > Smartphone Screen application pref‐ erence. X Select Android Auto™ or MirrorLink®. 126 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Selecting settings to start Android Auto™

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 135 · Applies to: 453

and MirrorLink® X Select System > Smartphone Screen > Android Auto™ Settings. or X Select System > Smartphone Screen > MirrorLink™ Settings. X Start smartphone screen application Select one of the following settings: RAsk me at each launch If the smartphone has been connected with the smart Media-System, you will be asked whether the preferred smart- phone screen application should be started. RYes If the smartphone has been connected with the smart Media-System, the pre- ferred smartphone screen application will be started automatically. RNo If the smartphone has been connected with the smart Media-System, a smart- phone screen application will not be started. Using MirrorLink® Useful information MirrorLink® is a standard for the connec- tion between the smart Media-System and a mobile phone. With MirrorLink®, the con- tent of the display on your mobile phone can be displayed in the smart Media-Sys- tem. MirrorLink® is available for mobile phones with the Android™ operating system. Further information: http:// www.smart.com/connect. To use MirrorLink®, observe the following requirements: Rthe mobile phone must support Mirror- Link® version 1.1 and above Rthe mobile phone is switched on Ra MirrorLink® certified app must be installed on the mobile phone Rthe GPS connection must be activated on the mobile phone Rthe time is set on the smart Media-Sys- tem Setting up a connection X Activate MirrorLink® on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Connect a mobile phone with a connect- ing cable to the USB socket in the centre console. X Select Yes. Apps which have been certified for Mir- rorLink® will be shown in the smart Media-System display. Calling up MirrorLink® apps X Tap 0 on the home page of the smart Media-System. MirrorLink® starts in the smart Media- System display. X Select the desired app. The display switches to full screen mode. X To leave full screen display: press and hold the ò button on the smart Media- System until the lower bar is shown. X To leave the display: select 2. MirrorLink® audio playback If your mobile phone supports this func- tion, you can control audio playback via the buttons on the smart Media-System. X To select the previous track: press the 9 button. X To rewind: press and hold the 9 but- ton. X To select the next track: press the : button. X To fast forward: press and hold the : button. X To mute: press the 8 button. Terminating a MirrorLink® connection X Select W > Disconnect. Using a mobile phone 127

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using Android Auto™

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 136 · Applies to: 453

Useful information Android Auto™ is an application for the connection between the smart Media-Sys- tem and a mobile phone. Certain mobile phone functions and apps can be controlled via the smart Media-System with Android Auto™. Functions such as telephony, navigation and the audio playback of Android Auto™ are displayed on the home page of the smart Media-System. Android Auto™ is available for mobile phones with the Android™ operating sys- tem. Further information: http:// www.smart.com/connect. In order to use Android Auto™, the follow- ing conditions must be met: Rthe mobile phone supports Android Auto™ starting from Android™ 5.0 Rthe mobile phone is switched on Rthe mobile phone has an Internet con- nection Rthe Android Auto™ app is installed on the mobile phone Rdata sharing must be approved Transmitted vehicle data when using Android Auto™ When using Android Auto™, specific vehicle data is transmitted to the mobile phone. This makes it possible to use selected mobile phone services efficiently. The mobile phone does not have active access to vehicle data. The following system infor- mation is transmitted: Rsmart Media-System software status Rsystem ID (anonymous) This data is transmitted in order to opti- mise communication between the vehicle and mobile phone. A random vehicle code is generated for this purpose and in order to assign multiple vehicles to the mobile phone. This code is not related to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted if the smart Media-System is reset. The following driv- ing status data is transmitted: Rgear position engaged Rinstrument cluster day/night mode This data is transmitted in order to adapt the content displayed to the driving situa- tion. GPS data such as coordinates, speed and compass direction is transmitted. This data is transmitted only when navigation is active in order to improve navigation (e.g. when driving through a tunnel). Setting up a connection X Activate Android Auto™ on the mobile phone (see manufacturer's operating instructions). X Connect a mobile phone with a connect- ing cable to the USB socket in the centre console. X Select Yes. Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- System display. Calling up Android Auto™ X Tap / on the home page of the smart Media-System. Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media- System display. Activating Android Auto™ voice-operated control When Android Auto™ is activated, the sys- tem can be operated with voice control. X Press and hold the button on the multifunction steering wheel for approx- imately three seconds. A tone sounds. Disconnecting Android Auto™ X Disconnect the USB connection between the mobile phone and the smart Media- System. 128 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using voice control for the mobile

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 137 · Applies to: 453

phone Useful information The voice control of the connected mobile phone can be used (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Not all voice con- trol services are supported by the smart Media-System. The requirement for voice control of the mobile phone is that Android Auto™ or Mir- rorLink® are not active. Activating voice control for the mobile phone X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Media-System via Bluetooth®. X Press and hold the button on the steering wheel. The o symbol appears in the display. Voice control for the mobile phone is active. X Say a command. Further settings Setting the volume X Select Settings > Sound levels. X Set the volume of the hands-free system and the ringtone. Activating voicemail X Select Voice mail. X Enter the voicemail phone number on the keypad. X Select Done. Voicemail is activated and the voicemail number is dialled. Configuring voicemail X Select Settings > Voice mail configu‐ ration. Updating the phone book A Bluetooth® connection must be present. X Select Phone book > W > Update phone data. Updating the call log X Select Call logs > W > Update phone data. Adding a contact to favourites X Select Phone > Phonebook. X Select the contact from the list. X Select W > Add to Favourites. X Dial a phone number. Connecting and operating external data storage media Useful information The following external data storage media can be connected: RUSB memory stick (USB 2.0 or 3.0 with max. 64 GB) or iPod® RSD or SDHC card (max. 64 GB) RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) RBluetooth® devices such as mobile phones The following formats are supported: RMP3 files RWMA files RACC formats (.AAC, .M4A, .M4B, .M4P, .M4V, .M4R and .MP4) ROGG Vorbis (.OGG, .OGA) RPCM 16 bit (.WAV, .PCM) A data storage medium may contain no more than eight directory levels. The smart Media-System only recognises the first partition of a data storage medium. The partition must be formatted as FAT or FAT32. Connecting and operating external data storage media 129

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Connecting external data storage

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 138 · Applies to: 453

media

Connecting a USB memory stick

X Insert a USB memory stick in the port on

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting an SD card

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

X Authorise and connect a Bluetooth®

device, such as a Bluetooth®-capable

mobile phone.

Operating external data storage media

Selecting connected external data stor-

age media

X Select Menu > Multimedia > Media .

X Select connected medium.

Controlling playback from a USB mem-

ory stick or SD card

Selects the previous track

; Selects the next track

= Stops and continues playback

? Switches track repeat on

A Switches random playback on

B Calls up the context menu

C Displays the playlist

D Selects a new track based on categories,

e.g. album, genre, folder

E Resumes playback at any point in the

track

Controlling playback from a Bluetooth®

device

Selects a new track ; Selects the previous track = Stops playback ? Selects the next track A Displays the playlist B Calls up the context menu Selecting a different device X Select W > Change source. Connecting another authorised Blue- tooth® device X Select W > Find new device. Enabling and disabling random play- back X To enable: select W > Enable shuffle. X To disable: select W > Disable shuf‐ fle. Displaying details of tracks on a USB memory stick or SD card X Select W > Song details. 130 Connecting and operating external data storage media

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Selecting a track from current playlist

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 139 · Applies to: 453

X Select New selection > Folders. The current playlist is displayed. X Select Find. A keyboard is shown. X Enter the name or part of the name of the track you are looking for. Selecting a track from categories X Select New selection. X Select a category for playback. Switching album cover display on/off The album cover must be saved in the audio file. X Select Multimedia > Settings > Media > Display album cover. Viewing images Useful information Images that have been saved to an SD card or USB memory stick can be viewed in the smart Media-System. The following file formats can be displayed: R.JPG R.GIF R.PNG R.BMP Image playback Starting image playback X Insert an SD card or USB memory stick into the corresponding port. X Select Multimedia > Pictures. X Select USB or SD as the media source. X Select a folder. X Select an image. Switching between images X Swipe left or right. Specifying a new selection of images X Select New selection. Setting image playback Switching from normal to thumbnail view X Select Thumbnails. Switching from thumbnail to normal view X Select an image. Displaying in full screen mode X Select W > Full screen. Activating the controls in full screen mode X Tap the touchscreen. Switching from full screen mode to nor- mal view X Select W > Normal view. Enlarging the image X Select W > Zoom in. Showing images as a slide show X Select W > Slide show. Setting the display duration X Select W > Picture settings > Slide show delay. X Set the desired time using the controls. Viewing images 131

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting default view for image playback

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 140 · Applies to: 453

X Select W > Image settings > Default view. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Video playback Video playback Starting video playback X Insert an SD card or connect a USB stick. X Select Multimedia > Video. X Select USB or SD. X Select a folder or video. All videos in a folder are played one after the other. i The size of the video file may have an impact on the performance of the system. Therefore, only playback videos with a length of up to five minutes. Selecting the next or previous video X Select D or C. Stopping and continuing playback X Select Ë. Playing a new video X Select New selection. X Select a new video. Setting the video view Playing videos in full screen mode X Select Full screen. Setting the default view for video play- back X Select W > Video settings. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Using TomTom Services Please note The smart Media-System uses a mobile phone connection for data connection. Please take note of the following informa- tion when using data services: RThe mobile connectivity and built-in SIM card for this vehicle can only be used for certain data services. These are offered by certain third parties as well as Daimler AG. Usage occurs via the smart Media-System in the vehicle. The use of data services requires the conclusion of separate agreements between the vehicle user and the respective provider. Voice service usage is not permitted. As such, the SIM card must be permanently installed in the condition in which it was delivered. RThe mobile communications connectivity and the SIM card may only be used responsibly in accordance with the applicable laws and other legal require- ments of the corresponding countries. Provided that this is within the power of the vehicle user. RUpgrading, reproduction, reverse assem- bly and disassembly of the SIM card are not permitted. Statutory authority remains unaffected. Failure to follow the above instructions can, in some cases, lead to temporary or perma- nent deactivation of the mobile connection and the SIM card. This depends on the severity of non-observance. The measure described here contributes in particular to the protection of Daimler AG and its con- tractual partners from negative legal con- sequences due to non-observance. The availability of mobile connectivity in indi- vidual countries depends on the existence of corresponding mobile service agree- ments with local mobile network providers. Availability can therefore change from time to time. The maximum period of validity for the mobile connectivity is 15 years from the time of installation in the vehicle. 132 Using TomTom Services

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 141 · Applies to: 453

In the TomTom Services menu, traffic infor- mation and other TomTom Services can be called up and managed. TomTom Live Services are available for a subscription fee. The following TomTom Services come pre-installed and, following activation, can be used free of charge for a period of three years: RHD Traffic RRadar cameras (not available in all coun- tries) RWeather RTomTom Places More information on services http:// www.tomtom.com/services. More information on availability in specific countries: http://www.smart.com/connect TomTom Services can also be called up and managed in the Services menu. In the main menu, select Services > TomTom Services. i If you have subscribed to the "TomTom Traffic" service and this is available, the "Traffic info" menu will be called "Tom- Tom Traffic". Activating TomTom Services TomTom Services must be activated in the smart Media-System before using them for the first time. If TomTom Services are not yet activated, a corresponding button will be displayed in the main menu and in the Services menu. To activate TomTom Services for the first time, observe the following requirements: Ran SD card with map data is inserted into the SD card slot Ra valid vehicle position is available on the map Ra mobile phone network is available X Select Services > Activate My Services. X Confirm the display messages with Yes. After a short while, TomTom Services are available. X Select Services > TomTom Services. The TomTom Services installed on the device are displayed. X Select the desired TomTom service. A display message appears. TomTom Services are activated. Starting TomTom Services X Select Navigation > TomTom Services. Checking subscription status for Tom- Tom Services The services available on the device and their subscription status may be checked at any time. X Select Services > TomTom Services > My services. The services available on the device and their subscription status will be shown. Subscription to a service can be extended via http://www.tomtom.com, subject to a fee. This requires registration at http:// www.tomtom.com/forsmart. X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and insert it into a computer. Further information: http:// www.tomtom.com/forsmart. Downloading updates and POIs If available, map and software updates as well as points of interest may be downloa- ded via http://www.tomtom.com. This requires registration at http:// www.tomtom.com/forsmart. X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and insert it into a computer. Further information: http:// www.tomtom.com/forsmart. Calling up the applications manager Information on smartphone screen applica- tions and smartphone voice-operated con- trol can be called up with the applications manager. Using TomTom Services 133

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Select Services > Settings > Applica‐

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 142 · Applies to: 453

tions manager. Calling up the connectivity manager The connectivity manager allows you to manage the devices connected to the smart Media-System. X Select Services > Settings > Connectiv‐ ity manager. Managing data sharing Please note If data sharing is approved, smartphone screen applications, for example Android Auto™, smartphone voice-operated control and the online charging station search are activated alongside TomTom Services. Enabling or disabling data sharing If data sharing has not been enabled beforehand, a corresponding message is shown when the smart Media-System is started up. Data sharing can be enabled or disabled at any time. X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ ing. X Select the setting. The following settings can be selected: RYes Enable data sharing RNo Disable data sharing. Displaying additional information X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ ing > About. Displaying text in another language X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ ing > Language. Using the navigation system Starting the navigation system Please note G WARNING If you operate information and communi- cation equipment integrated in the vehi- cle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehi- cle stationary. The navigation system does not provide information on stop signs, right of way signs, traffic regulations or road safety regulations. The traffic regulations always take prece- dence over navigation announcements. Observe the legal stipulations and traffic regulations of the country you are driving in when in navigation mode. Selecting the navigation system X Select Menu > Navigation. The following navigation settings can be selected: Rsearching for a destination Rplanning a route Rdisplaying a map Rcalling up TomTom Services Rchanging navigation settings Installing map data G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swallowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. 134 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 143 · Applies to: 453

dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek med- ical attention immediately. ! To prevent damaging data, only use the supplied SD card for Media-System data or to update map and system files. X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the centre console. X Switch on the device. The map data is read by the navigation system. Removing an SD card X Select Menu > System > Remove SD card. X Confirm the display message with Yes. X Press the SD card. X Remove the SD card from the slot. Updating map data Regular updates will be offered for the map data. The first update can be downloaded for free in the web portal within 90 days of vehicle activation. This requires registra- tion at http://tomtom.com/forsmart. Further information is available from any smart Centre. X Remove the SD card from the vehicle and insert it into a computer. X Install update software on the computer. X Run the map update assistant. i As well as updates, the latest software for the Media-System can be downloaded and Premium Voices by TomTom can be purchased. Entering and managing destinations Entering a destination by address X When using the navigation system for the first time, enter the country. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Address. X If desired, change the country using the flag symbol. X Enter the town or postcode. X Select the destination from the list. X Select the street. X Select the house number. X Confirm with Done. Searching for a car park near the desti- nation address This function can be called up when enter- ing the destination. X Select W > Nearby car park. A list of car parks near the current desti- nation appears. Displaying information about the desti- nation address This function can be called up when enter- ing the destination. X Select W > Show info. Entering a destination using the map A location on the map can be selected as the destination. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point on map. X Align the map view with the destination. X Tap the destination point on the display. The symbol selected is highlighted in blue. X Tap on the symbol to confirm. Entering a destination using the voice control system X Press the button on the multifunc- tion steering wheel. A tone sounds. X Say the command "Enter address". X When prompted by the voice control sys- tem, say the destination address, includ- ing street name, house number and city. X Say the voice command "Yes" or, if sev- eral possible destinations are displayed, say the number. Using the navigation system 135

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Selecting a destination from the list of

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 144 · Applies to: 453

previous destinations X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Recent destinations. X Select the destination. Entering a destination using geo-coor- dinates X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Lati‐ tude Longitude. X Enter the longitude and latitude. Setting a home location X Select Navigation > Settings > Set home location. X Enter a home address. Setting home as a destination X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Home. Selecting a saved location as a destina- tion At least one destination must be stored for this function. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Saved locations. X Select the destination. Managing saved locations X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage saved locations. Entering a point of interest POIs such as museums, restaurants or car parks near a location are displayed on the map. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point of interest. The following POI settings can be selected to select surrounding areas: RNear my location RAlong route RNear destination RNear Home RIn city X Select the surrounding area in which to search for a POI. The following category settings for POIs can be selected: Rlist of categories for POIs: e.g. filling sta- tion or restaurant RPOI name search RPOI search within a category X Select the category for the search. X Select a POI. Managing POIs Adding a POI category X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI category. X Enter the name and symbol for the new POI category. Deleting a POI category X Delete Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI category. X Select the category to be deleted. Adding POIs X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI. If no POI categories have been defined yet, a prompt appears to enter a POI cate- gory. X Select the category for the POI. X Enter your POI. Having POIs displayed on map This function enables the display of per- sonalised POIs on the map. X Select Navigation > Settings > Show POI on map. Deleting POIs X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI. X Select a POI category. X Select the POI to be deleted. 136 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Editing POIs

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 145 · Applies to: 453

X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Edit POI. X Select a POI category. X Customise the POI properties. Setting alerts for a nearby POI X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Warning when near POI. X Select a POI category. X Set the distance at which the message should appear. X Set the type of alert issued. Entering a destination via the TomTom LIVE service "TomTom Places" POIs from the "TomTom Places" online data- base are available using the "TomTom Pla- ces" function. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Tom‐ Tom Places. A list of search criteria appears which can be used to search for a POI. X Select the search criterion. X Enter a search term. If a large number of search results are available, 20 additional search results can be downloaded. Changing the route Useful information Once the destination has been selected, the navigation system calculates the route to the destination. The following options are available for adjusting route guidance: Rcalculate alternative routes Radjust routes calculated by the naviga- tion system Rplan routes in advance and travel via specific way points Radjust settings for calculating routes Once the route is calculated, a route sum- mary is shown. By default, the quickest route will be calculated for route planning, taking into account IQ Routes™. Traffic information is taken into account when cal- culating the route. The "route overview" function allows you to set whether the summary of a calculated route is automatically faded out from the display after ten seconds. If the route is not confirmed with Done, the view switches after approximately ten sec- onds automatically to the map view. Displaying a planned route Calculating the route X Enter a destination. X Select Done. Displaying the route details X Select W > Route details. The following settings can be selected: RShow instructions An overview of the route with directions appears. RShow map of route The route appears on a map. RShow destination The destination for the route appears. By pressing W, it is possible to search for a car park near the destination or add the location to the saved locations. RShow traffic on route Traffic disruptions along the route are shown. RSummary A summary of the route details appears. Saving a planned route X Select W > Save Itinerary . Changing the route Cancelling the route X Select Navigation > Change route > Can‐ cel route. When a new destination is entered, route guidance can be resumed again. Using the navigation system 137

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Calculating an alternative route

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 146 · Applies to: 453

X Select Navigation > Change route > Cal‐ culate alternative. A new route is calculated and displayed that takes you on different roads. X Select the alternative route or a previous one. Route guidance via way point The route can be adjusted by entering up to four way points. X Select Navigation > Change route > Travel via. If a way point has already been entered, a list of the saved way points will be dis- played. X Select Add. X Select a new way point from Address, Recent destinations, Saved locations, TomTom Places or Point of interest. The new way point is added. Avoiding road blocks The route can be changed if a section of road along the route is blocked or there is a traffic jam. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid roadblock. X Select the length of the route that needs to be avoided. Avoiding specific roads The route is calculated to avoid specific roads. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid part of route. A list of the roads on the route is dis- played. X Select the road that you wish to avoid. Taking traffic disruptions into account The route is recalculated based on current traffic information. Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. X Select Navigation > Change route > Min‐ imise delays. An overview of the traffic disruptions along the route will be shown. X Select the traffic disruption you wish to avoid. Planning a route in advance Adding a route X Select Navigation > Itineraries. X Select Add. X Select the starting point of the route. X Enter the route destination. X Enter at least one way point for the route. X Enter the route name. X Confirm with Done. Starting navigation using a saved route X Select Navigation > Itineraries. X Select the desired route. X Select W > Start. Setting route planning Selecting route types X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Route types. Select one of the following settings: RAsk for every route RAlways plan the fastest route RAlways plan eco routes RAlways avoid motorways RAlways plan the shortest route Selecting the setting for toll roads X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Toll roads. Select one of the following settings: RAsk for toll roads on route RAlways avoid toll roads RDo not avoid toll roads 138 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Selecting the setting for ferry connections

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 147 · Applies to: 453

X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Ferry connections. Select one of the following settings: RAsk for ferries on my route RAlways avoid ferries RDo not avoid ferries i Route planning treats the Eurotunnel as a ferry connection. Selecting the setting for unpaved roads X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Unpaved roads. Select one of the following settings: RAsk for unpaved roads on my route RAlways avoid unpaved roads Selecting the setting for carpool lanes Carpool lanes are lanes which can only be used by vehicles with at least two occu- pants. X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Carpool lane settings. Select one of the following settings: RAsk for carpool lanes on my route RAlways avoid carpool lanes RNever avoid carpool lanes Using information during route guid- ance Useful information Navigation announcements provide guid- ance during the journey without distract- ing you from traffic conditions. In addition, the display shows information about the route. Switching navigation announcements on/off X Tap on the area of the next navigation manoeuvre during route guidance. X Select Turn on voice guidance or Turn off voice guidance. Information such as traffic reports and warnings will be played even if the naviga- tion announcements have been deactivated. During route guidance, traffic information can be shown for the route ahead. The fol- lowing traffic information can be received: RTraffic announcements (RDS/TMC) RHD Traffic (a TomTom Live service) i HD Traffic Information takes prece- dence. Live services are not available in all coun- tries and regions. Further information: http://tomtom.com/services Tracking navigation on the display X To call up a function, tap on an area on the map display or on a symbol. X Tap directly on the map to switch to the overview map. The following functions can be selected: R:: to zoom in and out of the map view R;: maximum permissible speed is dis- played R=: name of the next main road or infor- mation about the next street sign is dis- played R?: to have traffic reports on the route displayed RA: to have the route details displayed RB: compass display and to switch between two or three-dimensional map display RC: to open the context menu RD: next navigation manoeuvre with dis- tance is displayed and to repeat the nav- igation announcement, change the vol- ume of the navigation announcement or switch off RE: information about current radio or audio equipment playback is displayed Using the navigation system 139

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Switch to the corresponding radio, multi-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 148 · Applies to: 453

media or telephone menu.

The navigation system zooms in on the map

view as the vehicle approaches a junction.

This makes it possible to follow turning

manoeuvres more accurately.

Shortly before navigating a motorway junc-

tion or exit, the display will show a three-

dimensional representation of the lanes

and the exit.

i Lane Keeping Assist is not available for

all junctions in all countries.

Traffic information details

Overall delay on route ; Traffic disruption (packed snow) = Traffic disruption (rain) ? Traffic disruption (traffic jam) A Current location and distance to next traffic disruption During route guidance, traffic information is shown for the route ahead. When there are a number of traffic disruptions in quick succession, only the very next disruption on the route will be displayed. Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. Colour Meaning Grey Unknown or unexplained situa- tion Orange Slow-moving traffic Red Traffic jam Dark red Standstill or road blocked Calling up more detailed information about the traffic problems X Tap on the display for traffic information during route guidance. Scrolling through the traffic reports X Tap on the message on the touchscreen and swipe left or right. Displaying the overview map Useful information With the "View map" function, the display shows a slidable, two-dimensional over- view map. The map shows your current position, as well as a number of other ele- ments, such as favourites. Displaying a map X Select Navigation > View map. A map of the surrounding area will be shown. X To search: select W > Find. Controlling the map view Moving the map X Tap on the centre of the touchscreen. X Swipe in the desired direction. The map will then move in the respective direc- tion. Zooming in on the map X Place two fingers slightly apart in the middle of the touchscreen. X Move your fingers away from each other. Reducing the scale of the map X Place two fingers at a greater distance apart on the screen. Do not place your fingers at the very top area or very bot- tom area of the display. X Swipe your fingers towards each other. 140 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Showing and hiding additional informa-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 149 · Applies to: 453

tion on the map X Select Navigation > View map. X Select W > Change map information. Select one of the following pieces of infor- mation: RTraffic information RNames RPoints of interest (POIs) RSatellite images RCoordinates Using TomTom Services with the nav- igation system Displaying traffic information along the route X Tap on the area of traffic information during route guidance. X Swipe left or right to switch between traffic information. Adjusting the route according to traffic disruptions X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Minimise delays. A faster route that had been previously rejected or route which may not have been taken into account due to the Never change my route setting for the traffic information is selected. Displaying traffic disruptions on the overview map X Select W > View map during route guidance. Traffic disruptions are displayed as sym- bols on the overview map. X To view detailed information, tap on a traffic disruption symbol. The following symbols are used: ± Traffic jam ´ Road blocked µ Traffic disruption · Construction site ¸ One or more lanes blocked ¹ Accident º Traffic disruption avoided using the traffic information ¿ Fog À Wind Á Snow  Black ice à Rain i Large area traffic disruptions such as rain, fog or snow are displayed on the overview map with several symbols. Viewing traffic information for the route to work X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. for route to work. Select one of the following settings: RHome to work RWork to home RChange the home to work route Selecting the settings for traffic infor- mation X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. settings. Select one of the following settings: RAlways change to this route If a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report, the navigation system automatically changes the route. RRequest confirmation for route If a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report, the navigation system will ask which route should be used. RNever change my route The navigation system will not change the route, even if a traffic announcement has been made. Using the navigation system 141

Using the smart Media-System. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Setting the navigation system

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 150 · Applies to: 453

Setting the voice The voice used for navigation messages can be changed. It is possible to choose between computer-generated voices or voi- ces recorded by professionals. For voices that have been recorded by professionals, only basic navigation messages will be spoken. X Select System > Sound > Voice. X Select the voice for playback. X To listen to the voice, select Test. Setting the voice output The read-aloud function is only available in a computer-generated voice. X Select System > Sound > Voice output settings. Select one of the following settings: RRead early warning instructions RRead aloud motorway lane instruc‐ tions RRead aloud traffic info when navi‐ gating RRead aloud foreign street names RRead aloud road numbers RRead aloud street names RRead aloud weather information RRead aloud POI warnings RRead aloud warnings RRead aloud signposts Changing the map X Select Navigation > Settings > Switch map. X Select the desired map. Changing the map colours X Select Navigation > Settings > Change map colours. X Press , or . to select the desired display. Setting safety warnings X Select System > Safety warnings. Select the desired settings: RSuggest driving breaks RWarn when driving near schools RWarn when driving faster than allowed RWarn when driving faster than a set speed X Select Resume. X Select a warning tone for the respective safety warning. For the "Warn when driving faster than a set speed" function, the speed above which the warning tone should sound must be entered. Setting the units of measurement for distance All units of measurement for distance in the navigation system can be changed. The units of measurement for distance of other displays are not changed, such as distance displays for the eco score or the on-board computer. X Select System > Set units > Distance units. Select one of the following settings: RKilometres RMiles Setting the units for GPS coordinates X Select System > Set units > GPS coordi‐ nate display. Select one of the following settings: RDegrees (d°) RDegrees, Minutes (d° m.m') RDegrees, Minutes, Seconds (d° m' s'') 142 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using smart "ready to" services

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 151 · Applies to: 453

Useful information smart "ready to" services are only available in certain countries. The functions are enabled via a communi- cation module and the smart "ready to" app. Information and the Internet addresses for the smart "ready to" services are available at any smart Centre. i If you are already using a smart "ready to" service, additional services can be activated with your user details in the usual web portal or via the app. The communication module and activation are required in order to use the smart "ready to" services: RRegister on the "ready to" web portal. A valid e-mail address and the vehicle identification number (VIN) are neces- sary for registration, and the terms of use must be accepted. RInstall the "ready to" app on your smart- phone and create a user account. Using the Key Card Holder Key Card Holder : is located in the glove compartment and is intended for the stor- age and inventory of the vehicle key and up to two cards (e.g. fuel card, parking card or car wash card). The inventory is available within certain smart "ready to" services. For an inventory, the key and/or the cards must be equipped with an RFID tag. Further information about RFID tags is available from any smart Centre. Using smart "ready to" services 143

Using online offerings. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Stowing small objects

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 152 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occupants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an acci- dent. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar sit- uations. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- ments or stowage nets. RAll closable stowage compartments should be closed before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger seats. G WARNING The cup holder cannot secure a drinks container in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situation and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an acci- dent and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suitable size in the cup holder. Seal the container, in particular when it contains hot liquid. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Using the compartments X To stow objects, use suitable stowage spaces. The following stowage spaces are availa- ble: R: Stowage compartments in the doors R; Cup holder in the front centre con- sole R= Glove compartment R? Stowage net in the front passenger footwell RA Sliding drawer in the centre console RB smart fortwo: spectacles compart- ment above the driver's seat RVelcro strip on the front passenger seat for stowing a handbag RCup holder in the rear centre console with a recess for storing a mobile phone Rsmart fortwo: stowage compartment in the lower tailgate RStowage net with two separate com- partments on the back of the boot sep- arator 144 Stowing small objects

Loading and stowing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Locking/unlocking the glove compart-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 153 · Applies to: 453

ment X Insert the key into the lock. X To lock: turn the key to position 2. X To unlock: turn the key to position 1. Opening the stowage compartment in the tailgate (smart fortwo) ! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maxi- mum load of 100 kg. It may otherwise become damaged. X Open the tailgate. X Pull handle : on the inside of the lower tailgate upwards. X Lift up the cover in the direction of the arrow. Stowing luggage and large objects Please note G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occupants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an acci- dent. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar sit- uations. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- ments or ruffled pockets. RAll closable stowage compartments should be closed before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger seats. G DANGER Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte- rior if the tailgate is open while the engine is running, especially if the vehi- cle is in motion. There is a risk of poison- ing. Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Stowing luggage and large objects 145

Loading and stowing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Observe the following loading guidelines

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 154 · Applies to: 453

when loading and transporting luggage and loads: Rdo not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occupants) Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the head restraints Rensure that no items of luggage can enter the vehicle interior above or between the seats Rensure that loaded objects are stowed safely and are secured Rload heavy objects at the bottom and light objects at the top Rthe load compartment is the preferred place to stow objects Rstow heavy loads as far forwards and as low down in the load compartment as possible Opening the load compartment (smart fortwo) ! The tailgates swing to the rear, both upwards and downwards, when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is suffi- cient clearance above, behind and below the tailgates. X Press the é button on the key. X Fold the upper tailgate upwards. X Pull lever : upwards. X Fold the lower tailgate down. Closing the boot (smart fortwo) X Fold the lower tailgate upwards and engage on both sides. X Pull the upper tailgate down and press it closed. X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. Opening the boot (smart fortwo cab- rio) Opening the tailgate X Press the % button on the key. X Press button : in the handle recess. X Fold down the tailgate. Opening the rear soft top X Open the tailgate. X Press both latch levers :. X Swing the rear soft top up. 146 Stowing luggage and large objects

Loading and stowing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Closing the boot (smart fortwo cabrio)

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 155 · Applies to: 453

Closing the rear soft top ! When closing the tailgate, you must first lock the tail cover. Otherwise, you could break the catch lever. X Pull the rear soft top down until it engages. X Lock the rear soft top with both latch lev- ers. Closing the tailgate X Pull the tailgate up until it engages. X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. Enlarging the boot: folding the seat backrest forwards Folding the seat backrest forwards (using the lever) Seat with a lever X Lift lever ; and slide the front passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Pull lever : forwards. X Fold the seat backrest forwards at the same time. Folding the seat backrest forwards (using the handwheel) Seat with a handwheel X Turn handwheel : forward. Folding back the seat backrest Please note G WARNING If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the event of an accident. RAs a result, a backrest which is not engaged would press you into the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could additionally cause injury. RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or loads in the boot. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every journey, make sure that the backrest is engaged as described. Folding back the seat backrest (using the lever) X Pull lever :. X Push the seat backrest back at the same time until it engages. Folding back the seat backrest (using the handwheel) X Turn handwheel : backwards. Stowing luggage and large objects 147

Loading and stowing. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Using the boot separator

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 156 · Applies to: 453

Fitting the boot separator G WARNING On its own, the boot cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of lug- gage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the boot cover. For easier fitting, fold the front passenger seat backrest forwards. X smart fortwo: open the upper and lower tailgate. X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail- gate. X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top up. X Hold boot separator : with the luggage net bag in the direction of the vehicle interior in the boot. X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; on the right side. X Slide handle ? to the right and hold. X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; on the left side. X Release handle ?. Boot separator : snaps into place. X Secure the luggage net bag with the Vel- cro fasteners. If boot separator : is not required and no subwoofer is installed, it can be attached to brackets =. Hooking and unhooking the boot sep- arator X Grip boot separator : in the middle and pull it back. X Hook the boot separator into left and right rear brackets A. 148 Using the boot separator

Loading and stowing. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Useful information

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 157 · Applies to: 453

The engine compartment in the smart is located at the rear, below the boot. Here you can check the engine oil level and top up the engine oil. All other reservoirs for ser- vice fluids are located under the service cover at the front. When working on the vehicle, always com- ply with all safety regulations. Always have work in the engine compartment car- ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Removing/fitting the subwoofer Removing the subwoofer X Release quick-release fastener : in the direction of the arrow. X Reach into the recess on the quick- release fastener. X Detach, tilt and pull the subwoofer to the right. X Pull out the connector. Fitting the subwoofer X Insert the connector. X Place the subwoofer at the base of the side trim. X Turn quick-release fastener : upwards. X Press the bracket into the recess in side trim ;. X Turn quick-release fastener : clock- wise. Opening and closing the engine com- partment cover Please note G WARNING The engine compartment cover can become very hot. There is a risk of injury if you remove the engine compartment cover to work in the engine compartment. Allow the engine to cool down before removing the engine compartment cover. G DANGER Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the engine compartment cover has not been fitted correctly when the engine is running, particularly whilst the vehicle is moving, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle interior. There is a danger of poi- soning. Always switch off the engine before removing the engine compartment cover. Make sure that the engine compartment cover has been fitted correctly. Opening and closing the engine compartment cover 149

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Opening the engine compartment

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 158 · Applies to: 453

cover The vehicle must be secured against rolling away. (Y page 170) X smart fortwo: open the upper and lower tailgate. X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail- gate. X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top up. X Vehicles with a subwoofer: remove the subwoofer. X Vehicles with a boot separator: attach the hook to the upper bracket of boot separa- tor :. X Fold up the carpet. X Unscrew and remove screws = in the engine cover. X Remove engine cover ;. Closing the engine compartment cover X Slide engine compartment cover ; for- wards to the stop. X Tighten screws =. X Fold down the carpet and push it under the side wall trim. X Vehicles with a subwoofer: fit the sub- woofer. X Vehicles with a boot separator: detach the hook on boot separator :. Opening and closing the service cover Please note G WARNING If the service cover is not locked, it may come loose during driving and block your view or endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, make sure that the service cover is locked before driving off. G WARNING If the windscreen wipers start to move when the service cover is open, you could become caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before you open the ser- vice cover. ! To ensure unhindered air intake, com- pletely remove any dirt or snow from the ventilation slots above the service cover. The vehicle must be secured against rolling away. On vehicles with a lockable service cover, the service cover must be unlocked before it is opened. Unlocking the service cover X Insert the tip of the key into the opening of lock cover :. X Press the key to the right ; to lever up the lock cover. 150 Opening and closing the service cover

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Remove the lock cover.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 159 · Applies to: 453

X Insert the key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwise. Opening the service cover X Pull both levers ; in the direction of the arrow. X Lift service cover = at the front. X Pull service cover = slightly forwards and lift upwards. X Carefully rest service cover =, still attached to the straps, against the front of the vehicle. Closing the service cover X Lift service cover =. X Slide bars A on the left and right of the service cover under the bars on wing ?. X Press service cover = downwards. X Press both levers ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. Locking the service cover X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position 1. X Insert lock cover : on the driver's side and snap it into place. Checking service products and top- ping up Please note G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respec- tive original container when using, stor- ing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed original container. Always keep Checking service products and topping up 151

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

service products out of the reach of chil-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 160 · Applies to: 453

dren. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an envi- ronmentally-responsible manner. Also observe the information in the "Service products" section (Y page 212). Service products include the following: Rfuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Rbrake fluid Rwindscreen washer fluid Rclimate control system refrigerant Service products approved for smart: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com Checking the engine oil and topping up Checking the engine oil level G WARNING Certain components in the engine com- partment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk of injury when accessing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leak- ing service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas sur- rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. Depending on your driving style, the vehi- cle consumes up to 0.5 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if it is frequently driven at high engine speeds. To check the engine oil, the vehicle must be parked on a flat surface. X If the engine has not been started for an extended period, e.g. overnight, the measurement can be carried out immedi- ately. X If the engine is at normal operating tem- perature after driving, wait five minutes before measuring. X If the engine was only started briefly and is not at normal operating temperature, switch off the engine and wait 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. 152 Checking service products and topping up

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Open the engine compartment cover.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 161 · Applies to: 453

(Y page 149) X Remove oil dipstick : from the oil dip- stick tube and wipe it off. X Insert the oil dipstick fully into the oil dipstick tube. X Pull out the oil dipstick. X Read the engine oil level. The level must be between MIN = and MAX ;. Topping up engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the components that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the MAX mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to engine damage or catalytic con- verter damage. Have excess oil siphoned off. ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or water- ways, it is harmful to the environment. Information on tested and approved engine oils is available from any smart Centre. smart recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Overview of approved engine oils: http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com, then enter the designation, e.g. 229.5. X Unscrew and remove cap :. X Top up with no more than 1 litre of rec- ommended engine oil. X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it will go until it engages securely. X Check the engine oil level. X Close the engine compartment cover. (Y page 149) i Regular engine oil changes using an approved engine oil from the suitable SAE classification are strongly recommended. Observe the information on approved engine oil in the "Information on service products" section (Y page 212). Checking service products and topping up 153

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Checking the coolant and topping up

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 162 · Applies to: 453

Checking the coolant level X Stop the vehicle on a level surface. X Let the coolant cool down for at least 30 minutes. X Open the service cover. (Y page 150) X Check reservoir ; visually. The fluid level must be between the MIN mark and the MAX mark. Topping up the coolant G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised, par- ticularly when the motor is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear protective gloves and pro- tective eyewear when opening. Open the cap slowly to release pressure. Only top up the coolant level when the vehicle is on a level surface and the engine has cooled down. ! Add only coolant that has been pre- mixed with the desired antifreeze protec- tion. You could otherwise damage the engine. You can find additional notes on the coolant in the following places: Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1 - on the internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app Rat a qualified specialist workshop If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approximately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen- tration in the engine cooling system should be 50% (antifreeze protection down to -37 †). This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approx- imately -25 †. X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ; with a cloth. X Turn the cap slowly one half turn. If nec- essary, allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn the cap further and remove it. X Top up the coolant to the MAX level. X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it will go. X Close the service cover. (Y page 150) i See "Technical data" for information on recommended coolants. Topping up the washer fluid G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components in the front compart- ment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that windscreen washer con- centrate is not spilled next to the filler neck. 154 Checking service products and topping up

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Open the service cover. (Y page 150)

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 163 · Applies to: 453

X Pull cap : upwards at the tab. X If available, pull the removable nozzle up as far as the stop. X Top up with washer fluid. X If available, push the removable nozzle down and push it inside. X Replace and tightly screw on cap :. X Close the service cover. (Y page 150) i See "Technical data" for information on windscreen washer fluid and antifreeze. Checking wheels and tyres G Warning A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. G WARNING If there is insufficient tyre tread, the tyre traction will decrease. The tyre tread can no longer dissipate water. This increases the risk of aquaplaning on a wet road surface, especially when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road condi- tions. There is a risk of an accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may wear differently at different points of the tyre tread. Regularly check the tyre tread depth and the condition of the tread across the whole width of all tyres, therefore. Minimum tyre tread depth on: RSummer tyres: 3 mm RM+S tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, have the tyres replaced before the legally specified minimum tread depth is reached. ! If you cannot avoid driving over obsta- cles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at an obtuse angle only. You could otherwise damage the wheel rims and tyres. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. Check the wheels and tyres for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on poorly surfaced roads. Run-in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. The tyres only attain their maximum performance after this distance. Vibrations, audible noises and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side, can indicate damage to wheels or tyres. If you suspect a tyre defect: X Reduce vehicle speed. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. X Check the wheels and tyres for damage. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres checked at a specialist workshop. Checking wheels and tyres 155

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Changing a wheel

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 164 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions may severely impair the driving characteristics. The service brake or wheel suspension components may also be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tyres are of the same dimen- sions. G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. G WARNING If you fit wheels and tyres with incorrect dimensions, the service brake or wheel suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with ones that comply with the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, pay attention to the: Rdesignation Rtype When replacing tyres, pay attention to the: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype ! To prevent damage, smart recommends having the wheel changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- ted in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, since this could damage the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Only position a suitable jack on the jacking point intended for the purpose. Only raise the vehicle briefly to change the wheel. Make sure that there are no persons in the vehicle and that it is on a suitable surface. Secure the vehicle with wheel chocks and apply the parking brake. Interchanging front and rear wheels or tyres of differing dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Rules for selecting new tyres ! For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use wheels and tyres which smart has specifically approved for your vehicle. These are specially adapted to the systems, such as ABS or ESP®. Only use tyres and wheels tested and recommended by smart. Certain charac- teristics, such as handling, vehicle noise emissions, fuel consumption, etc. may otherwise be adversely affected. Dimen- sional variations and altered tyre defor- mation when driving under load may also cause the tyres to come into contact with the vehicle body and axle components. This may result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle. smart is not responsible for any damage caused by using tyres and wheels other than those which have been tested and recommended. You can obtain information about tyres and wheels from any qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart Centre. 156 Changing a wheel

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The service life of tyres depends on various

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 165 · Applies to: 453

factors, including the following: Rdriving style Rtyre pressure Rmileage Observe the following rules for selecting new tyres: Robserve country-specific regulations which stipulate or recommend a certain tyre type for the vehicle. Ronly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. Ronly tyres of the same size may be used on a single axle (left/right). Ronly use tyres of the same type (summer tyres, all-season tyres, winter tyres). Ronly use wheel-tyre combinations approved by smart. Rdo not wear tyres out too much. This oth- erwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). Rreplace tyres after six years at the latest. Rthe use of a specific tyre type in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. i Recommended tyre pressures for vari- ous operating states can be found on the tyre pressure table on the driver's side door pillar (B-pillar). You can find further information regarding tyres and wheels at specialist tyre retail- ers, at qualified specialist workshops and at any smart Centre. Preparing to change a wheel The vehicle tool tray is located under the glove compartment. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Position the front wheels to point straight ahead. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal and shift to either first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Removing a wheel G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 156). Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: X Using both hands, grasp two hub cap openings and remove the hub cap. Changing a wheel 157

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub cap

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 166 · Applies to: 453

cover:

X Remove the hub cap cover.

Wheel wrench X Using wheel wrench : loosen the wheel bolts by about one turn. Do not unscrew the wheel bolts completely. ; Jack = Reinforced area for the jacking points Jack ; may only be positioned on the reinforced area intended for this purpose for jacking points =. The vehicle may be damaged if jack ; is positioned at another point on the sill. = Reinforced area for the jacking points ? Triangular indentation A Outer covering of the sill ! To prevent damage, smart recommends having the wheel changed at a qualified specialist workshop. The reinforced areas for jacking points = are located behind the front wheels and in front of the rear wheels. They can be recog- nised by triangular indentations ? on the vehicle. Jack ; may only be positioned on the reinforced areas for jacking points = on the sill and not on the outer covering of sill A. X Search for the reinforced area for jacking points = which is found approx. 7 cm behind the sill at triangular indenta- tions ?. X Position jack ; under the corresponding reinforced area for jacking points =. X Set the foot of the jack up vertically with respect to the reinforced area for the jacking points on the vehicle. X Make sure that the jack is correctly posi- tioned so that the vehicle cannot slip. 158 Changing a wheel

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Raise the vehicle using the jack until the

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 167 · Applies to: 453

tyre is a maximum of 3 cm off the ground. X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a wheel G WARNING The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. There is a risk of an accident. Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tighten- ing torque. If you are not sure, do not move the vehi- cle. Contact a qualified specialist work- shop and have the tightening torque checked immediately. The tightening torque must be 105 Nm. After travelling approx. 500 km, check the tightening torque and retighten if neces- sary. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. ! When changing a wheel, only use wheel bolts which have been approved for wheel rims and the vehicle. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (Y page 156). Fit tyres with a specified direction of rota- tion only according to their direction of rotation. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rota- tion. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and press it on. X Screw in the wheel bolts up to the cone. X Make sure that they sit securely on the cone. X Lower the vehicle all the way. X Remove the jack. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in sequence indica- ted : to ?. The tightening torque must be 105 Nm. X Check the recommended tyre pressure and adjust if necessary. After travelling approx. 500 km, check the tightening torque and retighten if neces- sary. i Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys- tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. Changing a wheel 159

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 168 · Applies to: 453

X Fit hub cap A such that valve B does not become trapped. X Press the hub cap evenly onto the wheel with both hands until you hear the hub cap engage. X Check to make sure the hub cap is seated securely on the wheel. Vehicle with steel wheels and wheel hub covers: X Fit the hub cap cover. Storing wheels X Store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place when not in use. X Protect against oil, grease and fuel. Using the tyre pressure monitor Useful information It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situa- tion. The tyre pressure monitor issues a warning when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor works properly only if sensors are present in all four tyres, and after the monitor has learned the cor- rect tyre pressure for the current operating situation. This occurs automatically in most situations, but may also be specified after restarting the tyre pressure monitor. Before restarting, check the tyres for the recommended tyre pressure. The tyre pressure monitor does not provide a warning in the following cases: Reven loss of pressure on multiple tyres Rsudden loss of tyre pressure, e.g. due to penetration by a foreign body Rincorrectly set tyre pressure The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor (on-board computer with a mono- chrome display) X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. X On the multifunction lever, press the ´ button repeatedly until the ° and h symbols are displayed in the instrument cluster display. X Press and hold the a button on the multifunction lever. The ° and h symbols flash in the instrument cluster display for approx- imately five seconds. The two symbols then light up. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor (on-board computer with colour dis- play) X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. X Select Settings > Tyre pressure moni‐ tor in the on-board computer. The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt cur‐ rent pressures as new reference values? message appears in the display. X Select Yes and press a to confirm. The display shows the Tyre pressure monitor restarted message. If the Tyre pressure monitor restarted message does not appear after five seconds, restart the tyre pressure monitor again. 160 Using the tyre pressure monitor

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Checking the tyre pressures

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 169 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. G WARNING If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be over- loaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pres- sure monitoring systems will cause the tyre valve to remain open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by smart for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of acci- dent. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. The table with the recommended tyre pres- sure for various operating conditions can be found on the driver's side door pillar (B-pillar). The tyre pressure table may also state air pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- gage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for that tyre size. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure table apply for all approved tyres. Checking and correcting the tyre pressure manually Only check the tyre pressure once the tyres have cooled down. X Drive the vehicle less than 2 km. X Park the vehicle away from direct sun- light for at least three hours. X Check the tyre pressure with a suitable tyre pressure gauge. Checking the tyre pressures 161

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 170 · Applies to: 453

X Restart the tyre pressure monitor. Using winter tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle therefore to winter tyres or all-sea- son tyres marked with M+S. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. smart cannot accept respon- sibility for this type of damage. Have the vehicle winterproofed at a quali- fied specialist workshop at the onset of winter. X At low temperatures, use only winter tyres marked with M+S. X When road conditions are wintry, use M+S tyres with the additional i snow- flake symbol. These tyres allow driving safety systems, e.g. ABS, to function optimally in the winter. X Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels. X When driving with M+S tyres, observe the specified maximum permissible speed. X Use only tyre types and sizes approved for smart. X When using tyres with a specified direc- tion of rotation, observe the arrow on the sidewall indicating the tyre's direction of rotation. After fitting M+S tyres: X Check the tyre pressure. X Restart the tyre pressure monitor. X If M+S tyres with a lower maximum per- missible speed than that of the vehicle are fitted, affix an appropriate warning label in the driver's field of vision. Using the limiter, restrict the speed to the max- imum permissible speed for M+S tyres. Using snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fit- ting the snow chains. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart Centre or a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe country-specific regulations. X Use only snow chains approved for smart. X Fit snow chains on both rear wheels. X Use snow chains only on snow-covered roads. X When driving with snow chains fitted, do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Changing the window wiper blades Please note G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, 162 Changing the window wiper blades

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

you can be trapped by the wiper arm.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 171 · Applies to: 453

There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! Never open the service cover or tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen or rear window. Never fold a wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen or rear window. Hold the wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the window, the window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Changing the window wiper blades on the windscreen X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- screen. X Release tab ; of bracket ? must be pressed towards windscreen 3. The catch tab is released from the bracket and the wiper blade can be pulled away from the wiper arm. X Slide window wiper blade : in the direc- tion of arrow 5 until the securing hook for the window wiper blade is revealed. X Remove the window wiper blade. X Slide new window wiper blade : in the direction of arrow 4 onto mounting = of wiper arm ;. The window wiper blade snaps into place. X Check that the window wiper blade is positioned correctly. X Carefully fold wiper arm ; onto the windscreen. Changing the rear window wiper blade (smart fortwo) X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until you hear it engage. X Unscrew window wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it is released from the retainer on the wiper arm. X Pull out window wiper blade ;. X Press new window wiper blade ; onto wiper arm : until it engages. X Check that window wiper blade ; is positioned correctly. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window. Changing the window wiper blades 163

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cleaning the vehicle

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 172 · Applies to: 453

Useful information Regular care maintains the appearance and quality of the vehicle over time. Observe the following when cleaning and caring for the vehicle: X Use soft, moist cloths. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved for smart. X Do not use acidic cleaning agents. X In winter, carefully remove road salt as soon as possible. Cleaning the vehicle exterior Washing in an automatic car wash or washing by hand Preparing the vehicle for cleaning G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic con- ditions in order to restore full braking efficiency. X Close the side windows completely. X Switch off the climate control blower. X Turn the windscreen wipers to position g. Notes on care of matt paintwork ! The following can give the paint a glossy appearance and thus reduce the matt effect: RRubbing hard with unsuitable agents RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight ! Only use automatic car washes which correspond to the latest technological standards. Never use wash programs which finish by treating the vehicle with hot wax. ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol- ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the purpose of paintwork care. These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehi- cles with matt paintwork leads to consid- erable surface damage or, more specifi- cally, to shiny, spotted areas. Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy wheels. Polishing makes the paint- work shiny. If your vehicle has a clear matt finish, observe these notes. By doing so, you can avoid paintwork damage due to incorrect handling. Washing in an automatic car wash X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Remove excess dirt. X Drive through the automatic car wash. X Remove wax from the front windscreen and the wiper blades. i If the windscreen wipers leave smears after the vehicle has passed through the car wash, this may be caused by wax or other residue. This residue can be removed with washer fluid. Washing by hand X Locate a washing bay equipped for hand- washing. X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Apply mild cleaning agent with a soft vehicle sponge. X Thoroughly hose the vehicle with a gen- tle jet of water; do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille. X Dry the vehicle off with a chamois. Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis com- ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. 164 Cleaning the vehicle

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Have damaged tyres or chassis compo-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 173 · Applies to: 453

nents replaced immediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least

30 cm between the vehicle and the high-

pressure cleaner nozzle. Information

about the correct distance is available

from the equipment manufacturer.

Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle

around when cleaning your vehicle.

Do not aim directly at any of the follow-

ing:

Rtyres

Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.

Relectrical components

Rbattery

Rplug-type couplings

Rlight bulbs

Rseals

Rtrim elements

Rventilation slots

Damaged seals or electrical components

can lead to leaks or failures.

X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.

X Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm

between the high-pressure cleaner noz-

zle and the vehicle.

X Keep moving the nozzle whilst cleaning.

Cleaning the reversing camera

X Clean camera lens : with water and a

soft cloth.

Cleaning the sensors

Vehicles with forward collision warning:

Forward collision warning sensor

; Parking aid sensors

Vehicles with Active Brake Assist:

Active Brake Assist sensor ; Parking aid sensors X Clean sensors with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible Cleaning the vehicle 165

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

from the outside to tyres or chassis com-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 174 · Applies to: 453

ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- nents replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod- ucts to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake compo- nents. ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after clean- ing, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should there- fore drive for a few minutes after clean- ing. By heating up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time. X Clean the wheels with an acid-free clean- ing agent. Cleaning the exhaust pipe ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as san- itary cleanser or wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust pipe with an acid-free cleaning agent. Cleaning the windows and windscreen wipers Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- tion and fold them away from the win- dow. X Clean the inside and outside of the win- dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent recommended for smart. X Clear deposits regularly from the wind- screen and rear window to ensure that water can drain unhindered. Cleaning the window wiper blades X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- tion and fold them away from the win- dow. X Clean the window wiper blades with a soft cloth. X Fold the wiper arms back into place. Cleaning the panoramic roof (smart for- two) ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plas- tic panes of the panorama roof. Do not use cleaning agents containing solvents X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic windows and wipe off with a moist sponge. Cleaning the roof Dry cleaning X Brush from the front to the back using a soft brush. Wet cleaning X Dry clean first. X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. X Rinse with clean water. Cleaning the soft top (smart fortwo cab- rio) Useful information ! Never clean the soft top using a high- pressure cleaner as water could other- wise enter the vehicle interior. 166 Cleaning the vehicle

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Only clean the folding roof and the rear

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 175 · Applies to: 453

soft top when they are closed. Dry cleaning X Brush from the front to the back using a soft brush. Wet cleaning X Dry clean first. X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. X Rinse with clean water. Cleaning the exterior lighting X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic lenses and wipe off with a wet sponge. Cleaning and caring for paintwork ! Do not affix stickers to the painted sur- face. Adhesive residue could damage the paintwork. X Remove impurities immediately by rub- bing carefully. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing care- fully with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. Cleaning the vehicle interior Cleaning the displays ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display sur- face when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. X Switch off the display and let it cool down. X Clean the display surface with a microfi- bre cloth and cleaner for TFT or LCD dis- plays. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibre cloth. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Wipe off with a moist cloth, or use a leather care agent recommended for smart. Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemi- cal cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Clean the seat belts using only lukewarm soapy water. Cleaning and caring for seats Please note ! Do not use a microfibre cloth to clean covers made of genuine leather or artifi- cial leather. A microfibre cloth is too aggressive and can damage the cover when used frequently. Regular care maintains the appearance and feel of the seats over time. Cleaning the vehicle 167

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Cleaning and caring for genuine leather

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 176 · Applies to: 453

seat covers X Wet a cloth with water and clean the seat covers. Do not allow the leather to become soaked. X Wipe off with a dry cloth. X Apply a leather care agent recommended for smart. Cleaning synthetic leather seat covers X Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean the seat covers. Cleaning cloth seat covers X Wet a microfibre cloth with detergent water. X Rub cloth covers with care, cleaning entire sections of the cover. X Allow the seat to dry. Cleaning DINAMICA seat covers X Wet a cloth with water. X Clean entire sections of the cover. Cleaning the artificial leather cover of the instrument panel X Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean. Cleaning the trim Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents con- taining solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Never attach the following to plastic surfaces: Rstickers Rfilms Rperfume oil container or similar You could otherwise damage the plastic. To maintain the appearance of high-quality plastic surfaces, do not allow surfaces to come into contact with cosmetics, insect repellents or sun creams. X Clean the plastic trim with a damp cloth. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended for smart to remove heavy soiling. Cleaning the roof lining (smart fortwo) X Remove heavy soiling using a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended for smart. Cleaning the carpets X Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended for smart. Cleaning the trim elements ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel clean- ers, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. X Clean the trim elements with a moist microfibre cloth. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended for smart to remove heavy soiling. Observing service due dates The ¯ and ° indicator lamps in the instrument cluster display are reminders of upcoming service due dates: R¯: minor service. R°: major service. Monochrome display: the indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds after the engine is started. Depending on the operating condi- tions of the vehicle, the time or distance remaining until the service is due, is also displayed. 168 Observing service due dates

Maintenance and care. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

The service interval is based on normal

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 177 · Applies to: 453

operation of the vehicle. Observe the fol- lowing if the vehicle is operated under arduous conditions or increased loads, e.g. regular city driving with frequent inter- mediate stops: X Carry out service work more often than specified by the service interval. X Have the air filter, engine oil and oil fil- ter changed more frequently. X Check the tyres more frequently. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist workshop. Parking up the vehicle ! Please note that if the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, vehicle dam- age may occur and the battery may dis- charge or become damaged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop for a consultation. Parking up the vehicle 169

Maintenance and care. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Securing the vehicle in the event of

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 178 · Applies to: 453

an accident or a breakdown Securing the vehicle ! When a tyre is damaged, the danger area must be kept clear of all persons. X Stop the vehicle away from traffic on solid, non-slippery ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Turn the front wheels to the straight- ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Passengers should leave the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Set up the warning triangle. In the event of a flat tyre, without TIREFIT the vehicle cannot be made roadworthy again using the on-board equipment. No emergency call can be made via the smart Audio-System. The vehicle owner and the driver of the vehicle are responsible for equipping the vehicle with an appropriate breakdown kit and seeking assistance in the event of a breakdown. Switching the hazard warning lamps on and off When the hazard warning lamps are switched on, all the turn signal lamps flash. The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on in the following cases: Ran airbag is deployed. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of above 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of above 10 km/h again after a full brake application. X To switch on the hazard warning lamps manually: press button :. Securing the vehicle against rolling away Securing on level ground X When changing a wheel, place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally oppo- site the wheel you wish to change. Securing on a downhill gradient 170 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Place wheel chocks or other suitable

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 179 · Applies to: 453

items in front of the wheels of the front

and rear axle.

Using the warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Warning triangle : is secured behind the

driver's seat backrest with a Velcro fas-

tener.

X Fold the driver's seat forwards.

X Remove warning triangle :.

Setting up the warning triangle

X Fold feet 3 out to the side.

X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a

triangle.

X Connect the reflectors using upper stud

1.

X Place the warning triangle at a suitable

distance.

Using a reflective safety jacket

Notes on reflective safety jackets

Maximum number of washes ; Maximum wash temperature = Do not bleach ? Do not iron A Do not use a tumble dryer B Do not dry-clean C This is a class 2 jacket The reflective safety jacket only meets the requirements defined by the legal standard if it is the right size and fully closed when in use. Replace the reflective safety jacket: Rif it is damaged or there is irremovable dirt on the reflective stripes Rif you exceed the maximum number of washes Rif the fluorescence has faded Removing the reflective safety jacket The reflective safety jacket is located in stowage compartment : of the front- passenger door. Reflective safety jackets Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown 171

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

can also be stored in the rear door stowage

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 180 · Applies to: 453

compartments. X To remove: take out the safety jacket bag containing the reflective safety jacket. X Open the safety jacket bag and take out the reflective safety jacket. X To stow: fold the reflective safety jacket, roll it up and stow it in the safety jacket bag. X Replace the safety jacket bag in stowage compartment :. Removing the first-aid kit i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the con- tents if necessary, and replace any miss- ing parts. First-aid kit : is secured behind the driv- er's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener. Return it to this location after use. X Fold the driver's seat forwards. X Remove first-aid kit :. Removing the fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front passenger seat. Removing the vehicle tool tray The towing eye and the TIREFIT kit are located in the vehicle tool tray under the glove compartment. X Remove bolts in the front-passenger footwell. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit Useful information The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. TIREFIT is used to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread, at outside tempera- tures down to -20 †. i The tyre inflation compressor weighs approximately 0.7 kg. At a distance of approximately 60 cm from the tyre inflation compressor, the following sound pressure level applies: RX-axis: 82.9 dB (A) RY-axis: 84.3 dB (A) RZ-axis: 84.1 dB (A) The tyre inflation compressor is mainte- nance-free. If there is a malfunction, con- tact a qualified specialist workshop. 172 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Please note

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 181 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre seal- ant is unable to provide sufficient break- down assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pres- sures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre sealant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immedi- ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre seal- ant impairs the vehicle's driving charac- teristics and is not suitable for driving at higher speeds. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the maxi- mum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle dis- posed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Using tyre sealant X Leave foreign bodies which have pene- trated the tyre in the tyre. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. X Remove the TIREFIT kit, consisting of a tyre sealant bottle and a tyre inflation compressor, from the vehicle tool kit. X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker to the instrument cluster within the driv- er's field of vision. Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 173

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Unwind plug : with the cable from tyre

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 182 · Applies to: 453

inflation compressor ;. X Remove hose A from the bottom section of tyre inflation compressor ;. X Unscrew the cap from tyre sealant bot- tle ?. X Connect hose A. X Remove the valve flap from valve E on the faulty tyre. X Unscrew the cap from filler hose =. X Screw filler hose = onto valve E. X Insert connector : into the cigarette lighter socket or the 12 V socket. X Turn the key to position 1 in the igni- tion lock. X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation compressor ; to position 1. The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approx- imately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/87 psi) in pres- sure gauge C. i Preventing damage to the tyre inflation compressor Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- pressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of 15 minutes, then allow it to cool down. The tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) in pressure gauge C. Allow any leaking tyre sealant to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. Have any clothing stained with tyre sealant cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro- ethylene. Further procedure if the pressure of the sealed tyre is below 180 kPa G WARNING If the specified tyre pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly dam- aged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and low tyre pressures can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving characteristics. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Slowly move the vehicle approximately 10 m forwards or backwards. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of 15 minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). Further procedure if the pressure of the sealed tyre is at least 180 kPa X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor. X Perform a test drive. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. X Stop after driving for approximately 3 km and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). The precise val- ues are located on the door pillar (B-pil- lar) on the driver's side. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. 174 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve on

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 183 · Applies to: 453

the sealed tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the tyre pressure Increasing the tyre pressure X Switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X Observe the display. Reducing the tyre pressure X Press button : next to pressure gauge ;. i Even unused tyre sealant loses its effectiveness over time. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist workshop. Jump-starting and charging the bat- tery Please note G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the bat- tery can lead, for example, to a short cir- cuit and thus damage the vehicle elec- tronics. This can lead to function restric- tions applying to safety-relevant sys- tems, e.g the lighting system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper- ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road condi- tions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop. Further information about ABS (Y page 57) and ESP® (Y page 60). G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the bat- tery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, cre- ating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit Jump-starting and charging the battery 175

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

occurs or sparks are created, the hydro-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 184 · Applies to: 453

gen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery termi- nals when connecting and disconnect- ing a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polar- ity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the bat- tery terminals while the engine is run- ning. G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing elec- trostatic build-up. The build up of an electrostatic charge may be caused by the following: Rwearing synthetic-fibre clothing Rclothing rubbing against the seat Rmoving the battery over carpet or other synthetic materials Rrubbing the battery with a cloth G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Immediately rinse off battery acid thor- oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention at once. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at tem- peratures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the bat- tery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. Observe the following at low temperatures: RIf the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at temperatures around or below freezing point, the discharged battery may have frozen. In this case do not jump-start the vehicle or charge the battery. RThe service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced drastically. RThe starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. RHave the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Have the battery regularly checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the service intervals in the Ser- vice Booklet or contact a qualified spe- cialist workshop for more information. Have the battery charge checked more fre- quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips, or if the vehicle has been parked for an extended period of time. ! Always have work on the battery car- ried out at a qualified specialist work- shop. Should it, in exceptional circum- stances, be absolutely necessary to dis- connect the battery yourself, please observe the following: Rswitch off the engine and remove the key. Check that all the indicator lamps on the instrument cluster are off. Oth- erwise, you may damage electronic components such as the alternator, for example. Rfirst, disconnect the negative terminal clamp, followed by the positive termi- 176 Jump-starting and charging the battery

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

nal clamp. Never swap the terminal

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 185 · Applies to: 453

clamps. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the vehicle electronics. Rin vehicles with automatic transmis- sion, the transmission is locked in position j after the battery is discon- nected. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You cannot move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. ! If a low on-board voltage, such as poor lighting, occurs or is displayed in the 3 display when the ignition is switched on, do not start the vehicle. A starting attempt could otherwise damage the batteries if they are cold or not fully charged. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic con- verter could be damaged by the non- combusted fuel. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally respon- sible manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a qualified specialist work- shop or to a collection point for used batteries. For safety reasons, smart recommends using only batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by smart. These batteries provide increased leakage protec- tion in the event of an accident. Comply with the following safety instruc- tions and protective measures when han- dling batteries. WARNING Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective cloth- ing; in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear protective eyewear. Keep children away. Observe the Owner's Manual. Jump-starting When jump-starting, observe the following rules: RAvoid multiple or lengthy starting attempts. RDo not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RFor jump-starting, only use batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a suffi- cient cross-section and insulated termi- nal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the donor battery connected for a few Jump-starting and charging the battery 177

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

minutes before attempting to start. This

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 186 · Applies to: 453

charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. RMake sure that the jump leads are not damaged. RDo not allow non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps to come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. RThe jump leads must not come into con- tact with parts which can move when the engine is running, e.g. the wiper rods or the fan. X Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating or lighting. X Turn the key to position g in the igni- tion lock. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Open the service cover (Y page 150) A Charged donor battery or an equivalent jump-starting device X Remove the protective cap from positive terminal : of your battery. X First connect positive terminal : of your battery to positive terminal ; of donor battery A using the jump lead. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X First connect negative terminal = of donor battery A and then negative ter- minal ? of your battery using the jump lead. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let both engines run for several minutes. X To disconnect the jump leads, follow the sequence in reverse. X Attach the protective cap to positive ter- minal :. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessi- ble, jump-start the vehicle using a donor battery or a jump-starting device. Charging the battery In order to prevent damage, observe the following requirements: ROnly use battery chargers with a maxi- mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ROnly charge the battery using a battery charger approved by smart. When using another battery charger, remove the battery before charging. RObserve the operating instructions for the battery charger. X Open the service cover. (Y page 150) X Remove the protective cap from the posi- tive terminal on the battery. X Connect the positive terminal on the bat- tery to the positive terminal on the bat- tery charger. X Connect the negative terminal on the battery charger to the negative terminal on the battery. The vehicle battery should always be suffi- ciently charged to achieve the maximum possible service life. The battery may dis- charge over time if the vehicle is not used. To charge the battery, a battery charger recommended by smart can be connected. If the vehicle is unused for an extended period, the battery should be checked fre- quently or disconnected at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. A battery charger adapted to and approved by smart allows the charging of the battery in its installed position. Further informa- tion is available from any smart Centre. 178 Jump-starting and charging the battery

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Towing and tow-starting the vehicle

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 187 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running Rthe brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical sys- tem When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require consider- ably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when tow- ing with a tow rope or a towing bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Information on the vehicle's permissible gross weight can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 211). ! Observe the following points when tow- ing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not lon- ger than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise dam- age the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehi- cle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50 km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. Observe the legal requirements for the rel- evant countries when towing and tow start- ing. Preference should be given to transporting rather than towing. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission must be in position i when the vehicle is being towed. i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the automatic locking feature. The driver could otherwise be locked out when pushing or having the vehicle towed. i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted: Do not tow the vehicle with the basic car- rier fitted. Towing and tow-starting the vehicle 179

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Do not secure the tow rope or tow bar to

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 188 · Applies to: 453

the basic carrier. Vehicles with automatic transmission: observe the notes on the selector lever when towing away the vehicle. Fitting the towing eye The towing eye can be attached to the front or rear of the vehicle. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool tray. X Carefully prise off cover : on the vehi- cle. X Screw in the towing eye to the stop. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground Vehicles with automatic transmission: X Turn the key to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to posi- tion i. The selector lever lock can be manually released in the event of an electrical malfunction. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. Vehicles with manual transmission: X Leave the key in position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Deactivate automatic door locking. X Turn the front wheels to the straight- ahead position. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Turn the key to position u in the igni- tion lock and remove it. Transporting the vehicle ! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels or rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as the axle or steering components. Oth- erwise the vehicle could be damaged. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. Shift the transmission to posi- tion i. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. 180 Towing and tow-starting the vehicle

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 189 · Applies to: 453

X Apply the parking brake. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position j. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Remove the key. X Lash down the vehicle. Emergency engine starting by tow starting The following conditions must be met before tow starting: RThe battery is connected. RThe engine has cooled down. RThe exhaust system has cooled down. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Fit the towing eye. X Attach the tow bar or tow rope. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Turn the key to position 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: activate manual gearshifting. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully, engage second gear and keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow start the vehicle. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: push the selector lever forwards towards q until the engine starts. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. X Vehicles with manual transmission: with- out depressing the accelerator pedal, release the clutch pedal slowly. X Vehicles with manual transmission: when the engine is started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Keep the engine running by accelerating. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Remove the tow bar or tow rope. X Remove the towing eye. Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Attach the cover to the recess at the top and engage it at the bottom. X Stow the towing eye in the vehicle tool tray. Manually releasing the selector lever lock In cases of an electrical fault the selector lever lock can be manually deactivated, e.g. if the parking lock has been deactivated for towing and should subsequently be re- applied. ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to prise out the cover from the centre con- sole. Otherwise, the cover or the centre console could be damaged. X Apply the parking brake. X Open the drawer on the front-passenger side. X Prise out cover : on the centre console from bottom edge ; using with a flat, blunt object. X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow. Manually releasing the selector lever lock 181

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 190 · Applies to: 453

and simultaneously press release but- ton ? on the selector lever. X Shift the gear selector lever to position i or j. Replacing the bulbs Please note G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replacing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. G WARNING The radiator fan may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the engine is switched off. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the front compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rremove jewellery and watches Rnever touch the rotation area of the fan Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from the fan Observe the following rules when replacing bulbs: ROnly replace bulbs when the engine is switched off. RDo not use bulbs that have been dropped or show signs of visible damage, e.g. scratches. RDo not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands. ROnly use bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. ROnly fit spare bulbs of the same type and with a specified voltage. RDo not allow bulbs to come into contact with moisture. RHave LEDs changed at qualified specialist workshops only. Change only the bulbs described below yourself in accordance with the specified bulb types. Replacing front bulbs Changing dipped-beam and main-beam headlamps X Switch off the lights. X Open the service cover. X Remove cover :. X Pull out the connector. X Press retainer ; inwards and to the left. X Pull the bulb out. X Insert the new bulb. X Lock retainer ;. X Insert the connector. X Replace and engage cap :. 182 Replacing the bulbs

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Replacing the front turn signal lamps

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 191 · Applies to: 453

X Switch off the lights.

X Turn the respective front wheel inwards.

X Push clamp : downwards.

X Remove cover ; upwards.

X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and

remove it.

X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb.

X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

X Insert and engage cover ;.

Replacing the side turn signal lamps

X Carefully insert a flat tool into recess :.

X Prise out side turn signal ;.

X Unscrew the bulb from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

X Refit side turn signal ;.

Replacing rear bulbs

Replacing the tail lamp bulbs

Tail lamps without partial LEDs

Rear/brake lamp

; Rear fog lamp

= Reversing lamp

? Turn signals

Tail lamps with partial LEDs

Turn signals ; Reversing lamp Removing the tail lamp cover Replacing the bulbs 183

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

X Switch off the lights.

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 192 · Applies to: 453

X smart fortwo: open the upper and lower

tailgate.

X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail-

gate.

X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top

up.

X Loosen screws :.

X Remove the tail lamp.

X Carefully insert a flat tool under the

plastic hanger on the tail lamp.

X Lift the connector and remove it.

Replacing a faulty tail lamp bulb

Rear lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) ; Turn signals = Reversing lamp ? Rear fog lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) X Release four tabs A on the bulb holder. X Remove the bulb holder. X Pull the faulty bulb out. X Insert the new bulb. X Refit the bulb holder. X Insert the connector. X Insert the tail lamp until you hear it engage. X Tighten the screws on the tail lamp. Replacing the licence plate lighting X Insert a flat tool into recess :. X Remove the cover from the licence plate lamp. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Insert the new bulb into the holder. X Insert the lamp lens into the licence plate lamp. Replacing the interior lighting X Insert a flat tool into the recess. X Prise out lamp lens :. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Insert the new bulb into the holder. X Refit the lamp lens. Replacing fuses Please note G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper- 184 Replacing fuses

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

age, the electric cables could be overloa-

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 193 · Applies to: 453

ded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with speci- fied new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for smart vehicles and which have the correct fuse rating for the system con- cerned. Components or systems could otherwise be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. The electrical fuses disconnect defective circuits. If a fuse blows, all the connected components and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse rat- ings are listed in the fuse allocation chart (Y page 214). If new fuses blow, the cause for this must be diagnosed and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop. Preparing the vehicle to replace a fuse X Apply the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn the key to position u in the igni- tion lock and remove it. X Check whether all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Replacing a fuse (left-hand drive vehicle) ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the dash- board or the cover. X Open the front-passenger door. X Open the glove compartment. X To open: open cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Replace the faulty fuse. X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it engages. X Close the glove compartment. Replacing a fuse (right-hand drive vehicle) X Open the driver's door. X To open: turn quick-release fastener ; by 90° using a suitable object. X Fold down cover :. X Replace the faulty fuse. X To close: close cover :. X Close quick-release fastener ;. Replacing fuses 185

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Replacing the key battery

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 194 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of chil- dren. If a battery is swallowed, seek med- ical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling system. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally respon- sible manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a qualified specialist work- shop or to a collection point for used batteries. X Fixed keys: unscrew screw :. X Insert a flat tool, e.g. a coin, into the recess. X Turn the tool until the cover of the bat- tery tray opens. X Replace battery ; with the positive ter- minal facing upwards. X Replace the cover on the battery tray and push it closed. X Fixed keys: screw in screw :. X Check the function of all key buttons. Open a door with the emergency release. 186 Open a door with the emergency release.

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

If the vehicle cannot be opened using the

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 195 · Applies to: 453

remote control key, the vehicle can be opened using the emergency release. If the driver's door is unlocked and opened with the key in the emergency release, the anti-theft alarm system will issue an alarm. To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. X Carefully remove the cover from the emergency release. X Insert the key into the emergency release on the driver's door. X Turn the key anti-clockwise. X Remove the key from the lock. X Push the cover into the emergency release until it engages. X Open the door. X To disable the alarm from the anti-theft alarm system: switch on the ignition. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the emer- gency release is located on the front- passenger door. Locking the doors in an emergency Locking the doors with the locking button X Open the driver's door. X Close the other doors and the tailgate. X Press and hold button :. An audible locking and unlocking sound can be heard. Wait until the third (locking) sound, before releasing button :. When the doors are locked, indicator lamp ; lights up. X Leave the vehicle and close the driver's door. The doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap are locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. X From the outside, check that the doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap are locked. Locking the doors with the emergency locking X Insert the key into slot : on the left door. X Turn the key towards the bonnet as far as it will go to position 2. X Close the left door. X Repeat the procedure described above on the right door. X Check that the doors are locked. i If you lock the vehicle using the emer- gency locking, the tailgate and fuel filler flap are not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. Locking the doors in an emergency 187

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Notes on display messages

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 196 · Applies to: 453

The display shows warnings, malfunctions or additional information. A warning tone also sounds with some display messages. Messages from all categories can contain important information that must be observed. Have error messages checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as soon as possible. If an error message is not followed up with a repair, this can lead to damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty including injuries or material damage. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. Colour display: low-priority display mes- sages can be hidden by pressing a on the steering wheel. High-priority messages are shown in red. The display messages are then stored in the message memory and can be called up for as long as the ignition remains switched on. Switching off the ignition clears the message memory. Locking and unlocking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The key does not lock or unlock the vehicle. A strong source of radio waves is interfering with the signal. X Stand closer to the door lock and try to lock/unlock the vehi- cle again. Key battery is low or discharged. X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency release or lock the vehicle with emergency locking. X Replace the key battery. Key is faulty. To lock: X Press the locking button and close the door within five seconds. The vehicle still will not lock. X Lock driver's door using emergency locking. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. To unlock: X Unlock vehicle with the key in the emergency release. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Key is lost. X Have the key deactivated or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report loss of the key to vehicle insurer. Side window will not close or will not open or close fully. Objects are obstructing the window guide. X Remove objects. 188 Locking and unlocking

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 197 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Side window is not reset. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the switch for closing the window until the window is closed, and then push the switch for one second. The side window opens again a little way. X Repeat previous step until the window remains closed after releasing the switch. Fuel filler flap will not open. Fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock vehicle. Key battery is low or discharged. X Unlock the vehicle using the emergency key element in the emergency release. C Red warning lamp lights up. If the speed exceeds 20 km/h, a warning tone also sounds. Colour display: the display shows an open door/tailgate. A door or the tailgate is open. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Close all doors and the tailgate. Locking and unlocking 189

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 198 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The exterior mirror is not engaged. The exterior mirror has been moved forwards or backwards by force. X Carefully move the exterior mirror to the correct position. The windscreen wip- ers do not function. The windscreen wipers are obstructed, e.g. by snow. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds. The windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The windscreen wip- ers will not stop or always wipe at the same speed. The combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the key from ignition lock. X Insert the key into the ignition lock, turn to position 1 and start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red 7 warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds after starting the engine (certain countries only). A warning tone sounds. The warning lamp prompts the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten the seat belts. The red 7 warning lamp lights up after starting the engine. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten the seat belts. The red 7 warning lamp flashes. A warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle is travelling faster than 20 km/h. X Fasten the seat belts. 190 Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 199 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red 6 warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Colour display: Mal‐ function Visit workshop appears. The restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered as intended in the event of an accident. This may apply to belt tensioners or airbags, for example. There is a risk of injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The 4 indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up. The front-passenger front airbag has been disabled (Y page 43). X Enable the front-passenger front airbag. The front-passenger front airbag has not been disabled and is malfunctioning. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The × indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 43). The airbag system is operating correctly. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. The × indicator lamp on the overhead control panel does not light up if the front- passenger front airbag has been enabled manually. There is a malfunction in the airbag system. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Vision, vehicle occupants, airbag 191

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Engine, brakes, transmission

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 200 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine will not start using the key. The steering lock is manually locked. X Remove the key from the ignition lock and then reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Turn the key. X Turn the steering wheel left and right. The engine will not start. The starter motor cannot be heard. The on-board voltage is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. X Start the engine. The engine still does not start. X Jump-start the vehicle. The engine will not start despite jump-starting. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The starter motor has overheated. X Let the starter motor cool down for 2 minutes. X Start the engine. The engine still does not start. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine will not start. The starter motor can be heard. The engine electronics or fuel delivery system is malfunction- ing. X Switch off the engine. X Start the engine. Lengthy and frequent starting attempts will drain the battery. The engine will not start after several attempts. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The engine will not start. The starter motor can be heard. The fuel tank gauge is at zero. The fuel tank is empty. X Refuel the vehicle. Engine is not running smoothly and is mis- firing. There is malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical component. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 192 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 201 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel leaking from vehicle. The fuel line or fuel tank is faulty. G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. Risk of fire and explosion by improper handling of fuel. You must avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and creating sparks. Switch off the ignition before refuelling and, if pres- ent, switch off the auxiliary heating. X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ; warning lamp flashes while driving. Risk of misfiring. The ignition system is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ; warning lamp lights up and engine output is reduced. Colour display: Reduced power See Owner's Manual appears. The engine is running in emergency mode. The ignition system may be malfunctioning. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ; warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. There is a malfunction in one or more of the following compo- nents: REngine management RExhaust system RFuel system RAccelerator pedal sensor X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 8 lights up. Colour display: Low fuel level appears. The amount of fuel in the tank has reached the reserve range. X Refuel as soon as possible. Engine, brakes, transmission 193

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 202 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red ? warning lamp lights up. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Stop Switch off engine appears. The coolant level is too low or the air supply to the engine radi- ator is restricted. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and the coolant temperature exceeds 110 †. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions, and switch off the engine. X Leave the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Check the coolant level and top up if necessary. The coolant level is sufficient. The electric engine radiator fan has failed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red ? warning lamp lights up. A warning tone sounds. Stop Switch off motor appears. The coolant is too hot. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away with the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. The red 5 warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Stop Switch off engine appears. The oil pressure is too low. ! Check the oil level regularly. If there is insufficient oil (oil level is below the MIN mark), there is a risk of engine failure. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine. X Check the engine oil level. X If necessary, top up the engine oil. 194 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 203 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red J warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Check brake fluid level appears. Brake fluid level is too low. G WARNING If the brake fluid level is too low the brake system may fail. There is a risk of an accident. Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Secure the vehicle by applying the parking brake. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the brake system repaired. Do not top up the brake fluid, as this will not rectify the fault. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The red J warning lamp lights up while driving. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Release parking brake appears. The parking brake is applied. X Release the parking brake. The yellow ç warning lamp lights up while driving and when stationary. Colour display: Mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual appears. The automatic start/stop system is malfunctioning and has been automatically switched off. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ç warning lamp lights up when stationary. Not all conditions for the automatic start/stop system have been fulfilled. X Please observe the conditions for the automatic start/stop system. The green è indi- cator lamp flashes during automatic engine switch-off. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: When exiting: remove key appears. Automatic start/stop system has automatically switched off the engine, the driver's door has been opened or a seat belt has been unfastened. X Close the driver's door. X Fasten the seat belts. X Restart the engine. When leaving the vehicle: X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove the key from ignition lock. Engine, brakes, transmission 195

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 204 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The green è indi- cator lamp flashes while the vehicle is stationary. Vehicles with manual transmission: the vehicle is at a stand- still. No stop preventers are active. The clutch pedal is fully depressed. The engine is not switched off automatically. The flashing indi- cator lamp is intended to remind you to activate the automatic start/stop system in order to save fuel. X Shift into neutral and release clutch pedal slowly. The engine is switched off automatically. The green è indi- cator lamp flashes. Colour display: To start engine: oper‐ ate the clutch again appears. Vehicles with manual transmission: the engine has stalled. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X If the engine will not start, release the clutch pedal slowly. X Depress the clutch pedal again. The green è indi- cator lamp flashes. Colour display: To start engine: shift to neutral appears. Vehicles with manual transmission: the engine has stalled. X Shift to neutral. The engine starts. Monochrome display: i flashes in the mid- dle of the display. Colour display: To start engine: shift to neutral or depress clutch appears when starting the engine. Vehicles with manual transmission: a gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is not fully depressed when starting the engine. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the engine fails to start despite the clutch pedal being fully depressed, then the clutch sensor is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: To start engine: shift to neutral appears when the engine is started. Vehicles with manual transmission: the clutch sensor is mal- functioning. X Shift to neutral. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Monochrome display: i flashes in the mid- dle of the display. Colour display: Park‐ ing lock malfunc‐ tion. To park: apply parking brake appears when starting the engine. A warning tone sounds. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the parking lock is mal- functioning. The vehicle is not secured against rolling away. X Apply the parking brake to park. 196 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 205 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: i or j flash alter- nately in the middle of the display. Colour display: To start engine: shift to P or N appears. An attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission in position h or k. X Shift to j or i to start. Monochrome display: i or h/k flash alternately in the middle of the display. Colour display: To start engine: shift to N appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion. X Select i to start. Monochrome display: e flashes for 15 seconds in the mid- dle of the display. Colour display: To start engine: apply brake appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: an attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission in position i, without applying the brake. X Depress the brake pedal. Monochrome display: j or h/k, i flash alternately. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Risk of vehicle rolling away Transmission not in P appears. A warning tone sounds. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the driver's door is open and the selector lever is in position k, i or h. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Close the driver's door completely. Monochrome display: S lights up. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunc‐ tion Visit workshop appears. Vehicles with manual transmission: the transmission electronics are malfunctioning. The system deactivates the automatic start/stop system and cruise control. X Depress clutch pedal fully to start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. S lights up. Colour display: Trans‐ mission malfunc‐ tion Visit workshop appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmis- sion is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine, brakes, transmission 197

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 206 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions S flashes alter- nately with the cur- rent transmission position j/h/k/i. Colour display: Clutch protection active See Owner's Manual appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: other pulling away pro- cedures result in the clutch overheating. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message does not reappear after acknowledging it. S flashes alter- nately with the cur- rent transmission position j/h/k/i. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Trans‐ mission overheated See Owner's Manual appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the automatic transmis- sion clutch has overheated. You will feel the clutch pedal pul- sate. X Avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres. If the display message disappears, automatic transmission is available again. Vehicles with auto- matic transmission: the transmission has faulty gear shifts. The transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicles with auto- matic transmission: acceleration charac- teristics are deterio- rating. The transmission no longer shifts into all of the gears. Reverse gear can no longer be selected. The transmission is in emergency mode. X Stop. X Shift the transmission to position j. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds. X Start the engine. X Shift the transmission to position h. X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ¯ or ° warning lamp flashes for a few seconds after starting the engine. Colour display: Next service due in … km or Service due … days ago appears. A service due date is approaching or has already passed: R¯ indicates a minor service. R° indicates a full service. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 198 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driving safety systems

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 207 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! Yellow warning lamp lights up. Colour display: Sys‐ tem inoperative appears. ABS is malfunctioning. Other driving systems may be deactiva- ted. If ABS is faulty, there is also a possibility that other driving systems may be unavailable. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a quali- fied specialist workshop. When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Red warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake force distribution inoperative Stop See Owner's Manual appears. EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist and Hill Start Assist are also unavailable. Other driving systems may be deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in emergency braking situations. If ESP® is not operational, the vehicle will not be stabilised by ESP®. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 199

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 208 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ Monochrome dis- play: yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. ÷ Colour display: yellow warning lamp lights up. System inoperative appears. ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving sys- tems may be deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- dent. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified special- ist workshop. Brake lamps may be inoperative and thus no longer working when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not drive on. X Check that the brake lamps are working. The brake lamps are not working. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The brake lamps are working. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ Colour display: yellow warning lamp lights up. Brake Assist Sys‐ tem (BAS) inopera‐ tive appears. The Brake Assist System (BAS) is inoperative. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ Yellow warning lamp flashes while driving. ESP® is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at least one of the wheels is spinning. X Pull away carefully. X Accelerate carefully whilst driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi- tions. ÷ and C and other warning lamps are lit. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunc‐ tion Visit workshop appears. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 200 Driving safety systems

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 209 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Colour display: ÷ Hill start assist inoperative appears. Hill start assist is malfunctioning. Vehicle will not be held automatically when pulling away uphill and may start rolling immediately. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- dent. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified special- ist workshop. Other driving systems may be deactivated. The brake system functions normally, but without hill start assist. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. h Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Cor‐ rect tyre pressure appears. The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check tyre pressure. X Correct the tyre pressure. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. Driving safety systems 201

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 210 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Tyre pressure Caution tyre malfunction appears. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a significant loss of pressure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and brak- ing, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Check tyres visually and, if necessary, follow the instructions for flat tyres. X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary. h Yellow warning lamp flashes for approximately one minute and then stays lit. Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative appears. The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restar- ted after a wheel change. G WARNING If you correct the tyre pressure without recalibrating the Run Flat Indicator, the system cannot issue a warning about a defective tyre in time. In the event of tyre pressure loss, the driving characteristics and the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. If you correct the tyre pressure, you must recalibrate the Run Flat Indicator. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. The display message continues to be displayed. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 202 Driving safety systems

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 211 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning lamp flashes for approximately 60 seconds and then remains lit. Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative wheel sensors missing appears. There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. G WARNING Risk of accident due to undetected tyre pressure losses. The system is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels have unsuitable tyre pressure sensors. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. J Red warning lamp lights up. ÷, ! yellow warning lamps light up while the engine is running. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunc‐ tion Stop See Own‐ er's Manual appears. The following systems are malfunctioning: RABS (anti-lock braking system) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) RCrosswind Assist RHill start assist Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The risk of skidding and having an accident increases due to malfunctioning driving safety systems. The brake system functions normally, but without the systems listed. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. This will greatly impair the ability to steer and brake. The braking distance may increase in emergency braking situa- tions. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 203

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 212 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: D yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering dif- ficult. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. D Yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Colour display: Steer‐ ing malfunction See Owner's Manual or Electronics mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual appears. Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering dif- ficult. G WARNING You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. If you are able to steer safely: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If you are unable to steer safely: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driver assistance systems Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red · warning lamp is lit. A warning tone sounds. Vehicles with forward collision warning: the forward collision warning detects obstacles on the road. Vehicles with Active Brake Assist: the collision warning detects obstacles on the road. X Pay careful attention to the road and traffic conditions and be ready to brake. The red · warning lamp is lit. The distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the current speed. X Increase the distance. 204 Driver assistance systems

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 213 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ^ warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Dis‐ tance warning inop‐ erative or Electron‐ ics malfunction Visit workshop appears. The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty. X Clean the sensors. Environmental influences or error sources outside the system are temporarily interfering with the forward collision warning. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow Roperating temperature is too high Ron-board voltage is too low The forward collision warning is operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. Warning lamp remains lit: X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the sensors. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp still remains lit: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ^ warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Active Brake Assist inoperative or Electronics mal‐ function Visit workshop appears. The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty. X Clean the sensors. Environmental influences or error sources outside the system are temporarily interfering with Active Brake Assist and radar- assisted recuperation. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow Roperating temperature is too high Ron-board voltage is too low Active Brake Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. Warning lamp remains lit: X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the sensors. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp still remains lit: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ^ and C as well as other warning lamps are lit. The central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driver assistance systems 205

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 214 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions à flashes for approximately three seconds. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Lane Keeping Assist inoperative appears. The windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the windscreen. Environmental influences are interfering with Lane Keeping Assist. Possible causes: Rheavy rain or snow or thick fog is impairing visibility Rthe sun is low in the sky and shining directly onto the sensor Rlane markings cannot be detected Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed do not apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning. The system electronics are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ¤ flashes for a maximum of five sec- onds. Colour display: the green à warning lamp flashes for a maximum of five sec- onds. A warning tone sounds. A lane boundary marking was crossed without using the turn signal. X Stay inside the lane boundary markings. X Use the turn signal before changing lanes. ¯ flashes for approximately ten seconds. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: ¯ Cruise control inoperative appears. Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ¯ flashes for approximately ten seconds. C and other warning lamps are also lit. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunc‐ tion Visit workshop appears. The central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 206 Driver assistance systems

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 215 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions È lights up. The speed display flashes. A warning tone sounds. The vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed. X Brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. È flashes for approximately ten seconds. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Lim‐ iter inoperative appears. The speed limiter is malfunctioning and deactivates automati- cally. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The Ò warning lamp flashes for a minute or lights up continuously. Colour display: Black ice warning appears. The outside temperature has fallen to or below 3 °C. There is a risk of black ice. X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather con- ditions. Battery, lights, heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Rear window heating or seat heating switches off automati- cally or cannot be switched on. Battery is not sufficiently charged. X Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

Red warning

lamp lights up when the vehicle is ready to start. A warning tone sounds. Colour display: Stop See Owner's Manual appears. Possible causes: RAlternator is faulty. RBattery is faulty. RV-belt is torn. RElectronics are malfunctioning. X Do not drive on. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: # Warning lamp lights up. Malfunction Visit workshop appears. Battery monitoring is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Battery, lights, heating 207

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 216 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: b Warning lamp lights up. Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activa- ted. X Switch off the engine. X Start the engine. Warning lamp remains lit: Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Warning lamp still remains lit: Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Warning lamp lights up. Malfunction See Owner's Manual appears. Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activa- ted. X Switch off the engine. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp remains lit: Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: b Warning lamp lights up. Brake lamps inoper‐ ative appears. Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: Switch off lights appears. A warning tone sounds. Lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. X Turn control knob for the lights to à or u. 208 Battery, lights, heating

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 217 · Applies to: 453

Bluetooth® connection Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A Bluetooth® connec- tion cannot be estab- lished between the smart Audio-System or smart Media-Sys- tem and mobile phone. X Ascertain whether the mobile phone is compatible with the system. Information about compatible mobile phones: http:// www.smart.com/connect X Check the security settings on your mobile phone. X Check that the Bluetooth® function is enabled on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-system and on your mobile phone. X Start the device search on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System and on the mobile phone. Navigation system in the smart Media-System Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions No map is displayed in the navigation sys- tem. The SD card with the map data is missing or damaged. X Check to see that the SD card is inserted. The position of the vehicle in the naviga- tion system does not match the vehicle's actual position. The GPS symbol on the display is grey or yel- low. GPS reception is poor. X Drive the vehicle to another position where GPS reception is better. The road's course in the navigation system no longer coincides with the actual road. The map data is out of date. X Update the map data. The navigation system does not display any traffic information. Route guidance has not been started. X Select a destination and start navigation. HD Traffic is not available or the subscription for HD Traffic has expired. X Check whether HD Traffic is available for the country you are in or upgrade the subscription for HD Traffic. smart Audio-System and smart Media-System 209

Practical advice. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problem

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 218 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There are no naviga- tion messages during route guidance. The road's course is not detected. The map data may be out of date. X Check if route guidance has started. X If not, select a destination and start navigation. Navigation messages are switched off. X Switch on navigation messages. Voice control system in the smart Media-System Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The voice control sys- tem does not under- stand voice com- mands. The interval for entering voice commands has been exceeded. X Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Voice commands have not been given from the driver's seat. X Issue voice commands from the driver's seat. Noise from the blower or wind noise are interfering with voice commands. X Avoid interfering noises. Voice commands have not been given clearly. X Speak clearly when giving voice commands. A voice command is unknown. X Enter voice command "Help". A list of possible voice commands appears. 210 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

Practical advice. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Obtaining technical data

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 219 · Applies to: 453

Information on technical data: http://

www.smart.de

The technical data was determined in

accordance with EU Directives. All data

applies to the vehicle's standard equip-

ment. Differences will be present in the

case of vehicles with optional equipment.

Further information is available from any

smart Centre.

Reading vehicle data

Useful information

Please observe the following notes for the

specified vehicle data:

RItems of optional equipment reduce the

maximum payload

RVehicle-specific weight information can

be found on the vehicle identification

plate.

RFor certain countries only: you can find

vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC

(CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY) docu-

ments. These documents are delivered

with your vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate position

Vehicle identification plate ; Vehicle manufacturer = EU type approval number ? Vehicle identification number (VIN) A Maximum permissible gross weight B Maximum permissible front axle load C Maximum permissible rear axle load D Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identifi- cation plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can devi- ate from the data shown here. The data applicable to the vehicle is found on the vehicle's identification plate. Vehicle identification number (VIN) X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost position. X Fold floor covering : upwards. VIN ; is located there. The VIN can also be found on the vehicle identification plate. Reading vehicle data 211

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Dimensions and weights

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 220 · Applies to: 453

The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: Rtyres Rload Rcondition of the suspension Roptional equipment Model Opening height : smart fortwo 1855 mm smart fortwo Dimensions and weights Vehicle length 2695 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1893 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1663 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims 1671.8 mm Vehicle height 1555 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum ground clear- ance 113 mm Maximum tailgate load 100 kg Permissible roof load 0 kg smart fortwo cabrio Dimensions and weights Vehicle length 2695 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1893 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1663 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims 1671.8 mm Vehicle height 1553 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum ground clear- ance 110 mm Maximum tailgate load without side bars 100 kg Maximum tailgate load with sidebars stowed 0 kg Permissible roof load 0 kg Service products Please note Also observe the information in the section "Checking and refilling service products" (Y page 151). Vehicle components and their respective service products must match. Therefore, only use products tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on service products The following table lists all technical data for the service products of the vehicle. Fur- ther information on service products: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com and in any smart Centre. 212 Service products

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Service

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 221 · Applies to: 453

products Specifications Fuel (Y page 82) Unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON that con- forms to the European standard EN 228. As a temporary measure, if the recommended fuel is not available, regular unleaded petrol with an octane rating of 91 RON may also be used. Engine oil (Y page 151) 226.5, 229.3, 229.5 MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval is stated on the engine oil containers. Corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze (Y page 154) 325.6, 326.6 MB-Freigabe or MB- Approval is stated on the corrosion inhibitor/anti- freeze containers. Windscreen washer fluid (Y page 154) Temperatures above freezing point: mixing ratio of 1:100 MB SummerFit to water. Temperatures below freezing point: for the correct mixing ratio of MB WinterFit and water, please observe the infor- mation on the antifreeze container. Tank capacity Model Total capacity smart fortwo 28.0 l or 35.0 l Model Of which reserve fuel smart fortwo 5.0 l Model Total capacity smart fortwo cabrio 28.0 l or 35.0 l Model Of which reserve fuel smart fortwo cabrio 5.0 l Engine oil capacities The following values refer to an oil change including the oil filter. Model Replacement amount smart fortwo 52 kW smart fortwo cabrio 52 kW 3.5 l smart fortwo 66 kW smart fortwo cabrio 66 kW 4.3 l Brake fluid G WARNING The brake fluid continuously absorbs moisture from the air. This results in the boiling point of the brake fluid lowering. If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low, vapour pockets may form when the brakes are subjected to a heavy load. This would impair braking efficiency. There is a risk of an accident. Have the brake fluid renewed at the pre- scribed intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB Approval 331.0. Service products 213

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Further information on approved brake

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 222 · Applies to: 453

fluid can be obtained in the following pla- ces: Rin the Mercedes-Benz operating fluid regulations - at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com - on the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app Rat a qualified specialised workshop Bulb types The following table lists the correct bulb types of the vehicle: Bulb Type Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps H4 60/55 W Front foglamps H 16 Bulb Type Turn signals PY 21 W Side turn signal lamps WY 5 W Licence plate lighting W 5 W Interior lighting W 5 W Tail lamps Bulb Type Tail lamp and brake lamp P21 5 W Rear foglamp P21 W Reversing lamp W 16 W Turn signals PY 21 W Fuse allocation No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 1 Starter motor 5 A Brown 2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown 3 Multifunction lever 5 A Brown 4 Airbag 5 A Brown 214 Fuse allocation

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Consumer

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 223 · Applies to: 453

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 5 ‑ ‑ ‑ 6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red 7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue 8 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 9 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow 11 Central control unit 15 A Blue 12 Central control unit 10 A Red 13 Central control unit 15 A Blue 14 Power window switch (without reversing func- tion) 30 A Green 15 ESP®, transmission control unit 5 A Brown 16 Interior lighting 10 A Red 17 Immobiliser 3 A Violet 18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown 19 Brake lamps 10 A Red 20 Cruise control, radio, belt warning 15 A Blue 21 Not for smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour: central control unit, fuel pump, ignition system 15 A Blue 22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue 23 Starter motor smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: power supply control unit 40 A Orange 24 ‑ ‑ ‑ 25 Power supply control unit 30 A Green 26 Radio 20 A Yellow 27 Daytime driving lamps 5 A Brown 28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue 29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown 30 Forward collision warning 15 A Blue 31 ‑ ‑ ‑ 32 Radio, central control unit 15 A Blue Fuse allocation 215

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Consumer

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 224 · Applies to: 453

No. Consumer Current Colour cod- ing 33 Tail lamps, front foglamps, hazard warning lamp button, locking button, headlamp range control, power windows, licence plate lighting, radio, control unit for heating or climate control system, cruise control, limiter, parking aid but- ton, program selector button, tailgate release, Lane Keeping Assist camera, automatic start/ stop system button 25 A Cyan 34 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan 35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan 36 - 40 ‑ ‑ ‑ 41 smart EQ forfour only: seat heating in the rear 15 A Blue 42 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: seat heating in the front 25 A Cyan 43 Mirror heating 5 A Brown 44 Power windows (automatic reversing feature) 25 A Cyan 45 Transmission control unit smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: EV control unit 5 A Brown 46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow 47 ‑ ‑ ‑ 48 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: vacuum pump 10 A Red 49 smart EQ fortwo, smart EQ fortwo cabrio, smart EQ forfour only: heating control unit, air-condi- tioning 10 A Red 216 Fuse allocation

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Radio type approvals for the tyre

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 225 · Applies to: 453

pressure monitors Country Radio type approval number Argen- tina MW2433A H-12337 GG4 H-12338 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Abu Dhabi Dubai TRA, Registered-NO ER0092100/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 MHz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philip- pines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 Singa- pore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 South Africa TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones G WARNING The electromagnetic radiation from two- way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics if they are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly. This could jeop- ardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in the vehicle, their electromagnetic radiation can interfere with the vehicle electronics, for example if: Rthe two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly mounted or is not low-reflection This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low- reflection exterior aerial. ! Have the engine electronics and associ- ated parts, such as control units, sensors, actuating components or electric cables serviced only at a qualified specialist workshop. Vehicle components may oth- erwise wear more quickly and the vehi- cle's operating permit may be invalida- ted. ! The operating permit may be invalida- ted if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. Installing two-way radios and mobile phones 217

Technical data. Z Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

In particular, the following requirements

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 226 · Applies to: 453

must be complied with:

Ronly approved wavebands may be used

Robserve the maximum permissible out-

put in these wavebands

Ronly approved aerial positions may be

used

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia-

tion can cause damage to health. The use of

an exterior aerial takes into consideration

the scientific discussion surrounding the

possible health risk posed by electromag-

netic fields.

The following aerial positions may be used

for the correct installation of two-way

radios:

Front roof area ; Rear roof area Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connections intended for use in the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manu- facturer's additional instructions during installation. Deviations with respect to wavebands, maximum transmission outputs or aerial positions must be approved by smart. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Tetra 380 - 410 MHz 20 W Mobile communications generation 2G/3G/4G 6 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: Rtwo-way radios with a maximum trans- mission output of up to 100 mW Rmobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: Rtetra Rmobile communications (2G/3G/4G) 218 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones

Technical data. Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 227 · Applies to: 453

219 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 228 · Applies to: 453

220 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Publication details

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 229 · Applies to: 453

Internet Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.smart.com http://www.daimler.com Editorial office You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documen- tation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 27.06.2018 Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

É4535849415)ËÍ

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 230 · Applies to: 453

4535849415 Order no. 6522 0302 02 Part no. 4535849415 Edition ÄJ2018-1b www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Other ManualsLib Projects

Fortwo_453_2018_Owner_Manual_224p.pdf · p. 231 · Applies to: 453

www.manualslib.com www.manualslib.de www.manualslib.es www.manualslib.fr www.manualslib.nl www.manualslib.mx www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages